Big Book 082014

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/big-book-082014 1/240

weM ey ‡Ki 27 wU †U‡÷i me¸‡jv wiwWs KgwcÖ ‡nbkb c¨v‡mR‡K GK mv‡_ GB wcwWGd dvB‡j mwbœ ‡ewkZ Kiv n‡q‡Q| g~ j weM ey ‡K GB c¨v‡mR¸‡jv AwbqwgZ fv‡e Qov‡bv wQUv‡bv wQj|

c¨v‡mR¸‡jv‡K WU hy ³ msL¨v w`‡q wPwýZ Kiv n‡q‡Q †hLv‡b cÖ_g msL¨vwU g~ j weMey ‡Ki †U÷ bs Ges wØZxq msL¨vwU D³ †U‡÷i Aax‡b cÖ_g ev wØZxq†Kvb fvev© j Ask †_‡K †bIqv n‡q‡Q

Zv cÖ Kvk K‡i| cÖ wZwU fve© vj †mKk‡b

†h‡nZz `y BwU c¨v‡mR _v‡K (GKwU †QvUI GKwU eo), G‡ì‡K h_vµ‡g p1 I p2 w`‡q cÖ Kvk Kiv n‡q‡Q| D`vniY

^ iƒc, 13 bs †U÷ Gi wØZxq fve© vj

†mKk‡bi cÖ_g c¨v‡m‡Ri †KvW n‡e13.2 p1| GB cÖ Kvk ixwZ Avgiv GB

wcwWGd dvBj Ges AbjvBb †U÷ mvB‡U eënvi K‡iwQ|

GB dvB‡ji g‡a¨ †KejgvÎ g~ j weMey ‡Ki c¨v‡mR I cÖ kœ mwbœ ‡ewkZ n‡q‡Q| bgy bv wnmv‡e †KejgvÎ 1.1 p1

c¨v‡mRwU cÖ kœ mn Aby ev` K‡i †Ìqv n‡q‡Q (see page 7)| †Kvb c¨v‡m‡Ric‡i D³ c¨v‡m‡Ri KwVb kã¸‡jvi

A_© †Ìqv nqwb|

evsjv weMKz ‡Ki wcÖ ›U fvm© ‡bi g‡a¨c¨v‡mR¸‡jvi evsjv Aby ev` cvIqv hv‡e†mB mv‡_ me¸‡jv KwVb k‡ãi A_©I†Ìqv n‡q‡Q|

grecenter.net/bigbo

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/big-book-082014 2/240 AbjvBb weMey K: wRAviB †m›Uv‡ii GKwU wn‰Zlx D‡`¨vM

It has been known or many decades that theappearance o is roughly periodic, with anaverage cycle o

solar cosmic rays,ultraviolet radiation, and x-radiation all vary directlywith the sunspot cycle. But afer more than a century o

investigation, the relation o solar activity cycle, toterrestrial weather and climate remains unclear. Forexample, the sunspot cycle and the allied magnetic-polarity cycle have been link

s rainall, temperature, andwinds. Invariably, however, the relation is weak, andcommonly o dubious statistical significance.

Effects o solar variabilitrecorded sunspot activity

in the notes kept by European observers in the lateseventeenth and early eighteenth centuries has led somescholars to postulate a brie

the Maunder minimum).Te Maunder minimum has been linked to a span ounusual cold in

et to be established, however, especiallysince the records that Chinese naked-eye observers osolar activity made at that time appear to contradict it.Scientists have also sought evidence o long term solarperiodicities by

ords o the thickness o ancient treerings. Tese studies, however, ailed to link unequivocallyterrestrial clima

e’s past existence.I consistent and reliable geological or archaeological

evidence tracing the solar activity cycle in the distant pastcould be ound,

how to model solar activity. Currentlythere are two model o solar activity. Te first supposesthat the Sun’s internal motions (caused by rotation andconvection) interact with its large-scale magnetic fieldto produce a dy

to the energy o a magnetic field.In short, the Sun’s large scale magnetic field is takento be sel sustaining

ined with little overall changeor perhaps billions o years. Te alternative explanationsupposes that the Sun’s large scale magnetic field is aremnant o the field the Sun acquired when it ormed,and is not sustained against decay. In this model, the solarmechanism dependent on the Su

acteristics o the solaractivity cycle could be expected to change over a longperiod o time. Modern solar observations span too shorta time to reveal whether present cyclical solar activityis a long-lived eature o the Sun

17. Te author ocuses primarily on

(A) presenting solar activity and evaluating

geological evidence ofen cited to supportthem

(B) giving a br

ments in solar physics and assessingtheir impact on uture climatological research

(C) discussing the difficulties involved in linkingterrestr

ng how resolving that issue couldhave an impact on our understanding o solarphysics

(D) pointingc inquiry into the terrestrial effects

o solar activity and recommending itsabandonment in avor o purely physicsoriented research

(E) outlining the specific reasons why a problemin solar pe overly theoretical approach o

modem physicists

18. Which o the ollowing statements about the twomodel

55 , is accurate?

(A) In both models cyclical solar activity isregarded as a long lived eature o the Sun,persisting with little change over billions oyears.

(B) In both models the solar activity cycle ishypothemagnetic field.

(C) In one model the Sun’s magnetic field is thoughto play a role in causing solar activity,whereas in the other model it is not.

(D) In one model solar activity is presumed to beunrelated to terrestrial phenomena, whereasin the other model solar activity is thought tohave observa

cles o solar activity withperiodicities longer than a ew decades areconsidered to be impossible, whereas in theoilier model such cycles are predicted.

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

Test 1.1 P1

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. According to the passage, late seventeenth and earlyeighteenth century

lowing reasons?

(A) Taunder minimum was predicated wereincorrect.

(B) Tot be related to climate.

(C) Tey suggest that the Maunder minimummight or Europe.

(D) Tey estaby cold weather worldwide at the time

o the Maunder minimum.(E) Tey establish that solar activity at the time o

the Mm its present pattern.

20. Te author implies which o the ollowing about

currently oncerning the solar activity cycle?

(A) It best supports the model o solar activitydescribed in

(B) It best supports the model o solar activitydescribed in lines 45-52

(C) It is insufficient to confirm either model o solaractivity d in the third paragraph.

(D) It contradicts both models o solar activity asthey are presented in the third paragraph.

(E) It disproves the theory that terrestrial weatherand solar activity are linked in some way.

21. It can be inerred rom the passage that the argumentin avor o the model described in lines 37-45would be stren ned i which o the ollowingwere ound to be true?

(A) Episodes o intense volcanic eruptions in thedistant past occurred in cycles having verylong periodicities.

(B) At the present time the global level o thunderstorm activity increases and decreases incycles with periodicities o approximately 11years.

(C) In the distant past cyclical climatic changes hadperiodi han 200 years.

(D) In the last century the length o the sunspotcycle has been known to vary by as much as 2years rom its average periodicity o 11 years.

(E) Hundreds o millions o years ago, solar activitycycles displayed the same periodicities as dopresent day solar activity cycles.

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that Chineseobservations o the Sun during the late seventeenthand early eighteenth centuries

(A) are ambiguous because most sunspots cannotbe seen with the naked eye

(B) probably were made under the same weather

conditions as those made in Europe(C) are more reliable than European observations

made during this period(D) record some sunspot activity during this period(E) have been em entists seeking to

argue that a change in solar activity occurredduring this period

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that studiesattempting to use tree ring thickness to locatepossible links bet

sed on which o the

ollowing assumptions?(A) Te solar activity cycle existed in its present

orm during the time period in which the treerings grew.

(B) Te biological mechanisms causing treegrowth are unaffected by short term weatherpatterns.

(C) Average tree ring thickness varies rom speciesto species.

(D) tree ring thicknesses reflect changes interrestrial climate.

(E) Both terrestrial climate and the solar activity

cycle randomly affect tree ring thickness.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Te common belie o some linguists that eachlanguage is a perect vehicle or the thoughts o thenation speaking it is in some ways the exact counterparto the conviction o the Manchester school o economicsthat supply and demand will regulate everything orthe best. Just as economists

y and demand lef actualwants unsatisfied, so also many linguists are dea tothose instances in which the very nature o a languagecalls orth misunderstandings in everyday conversation,and in which, consequently, a word has to be modifiedor defined in order to present the idea intended by thespeaker: “He took his stick

t unreasonable to investigatethe relative merits o different languages or o differentdetails in languages.

24. Te primary purpose o the passage is to

(A) analyze an interesting eature o the Englishlanguage

(B) reute a belie held by some linguists(C) show that ec levant to

linguistic study (D) illustrate the conusion that can result rom the

improper use o language(E) suggest a way in which languages can be made

more nearly perect

25. Te misunderstanding presented by the author inlines 13-14 is similar ollowing?

I. X uses the word “you” to reer to a group, but Ythinks that X is reerring to one person only.

II. X mistakenl maly” to reerto a typical example, but Y knows that“anomaly” means “exception.”

III. X uses the word “bachelor” to mean “unmarriedman,” but Y mistakenly thinks that bachelormeans “unmarried woman.”

(A) I only (B)(C) III only(D) I and II only(E) II and III only

26. In presenting the argument, the author does all o theollowing EXCEP

(A) give an example

(C) make a generalization(D) make a comparison

(E) present a paradox

27. Which o the ollowing contributes to themisundersta hor in lines13-14?

(A) It is unclear whom the speaker o the sentenceis addressing

(B) It is unclear to whom the word “his” reers thefirst time it is used

(C) It is unclear to whom the word “his” reers thesec used

(D) Te meaning o “took” is ambiguous.

(E) It is unclear to whom “He” reers.

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

Test 1.1 P2

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 1.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) B

19) A

20) C

21) E

22) D

23) D

SECOND PASSAGE

24) B

25) A

26) E

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


‡U÷ (1) ‡mKkb (1)

c¨v‡mR 01

eû hyM a‡i GUv Rvbv Av‡Q ‡h m~ ‡h© i `vM (mvb ¯úU) Dcw¯’ wZ A‡bKUvcy btAveZ© bkxj hv M‡o GMv‡iv eQi cici n‡q _v‡K| Dciš‘ wePÿ Z

‡mŠiwkLv Ges gnvRvMwZK ‡mŠi-iwk¥ cÖevn, AwZ‡e¸bx we”Qy iY, Ges iÄb we”Qy iY meB mivmwi m~ ‡h© i `vM P‡µi mv‡_ cwiewZ© Z nq| wKš‘ kZe‡l© iI AwaK mg‡qi Aby mÜv‡bi ci, G¸‡jv Ges Ab¨ NUbvejxGKwÎZ fv‡e ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ wnmv‡e cwiwPwZ ‡c‡q‡Q hv ‡fŠMwjK

Rjevqy I AvevnvIqvi Kv‡Q A¯úó| D`vniY ¯ iƒc, m~ ‡h© I `vM PµGes GKB ai‡bi Py ¤^ K-‡giæ P‡µi g‡a GKUv … k¨gvb ‡hvMm~ Î Av‡QGiƒc ZviZ‡gï BwZnv‡m ‡hgb e… wócvZ, ZvcgvÎv, Ges evZvm|

wbwðZfv‡e, hvB †nvK, e‡jB w`jvg, m¤úK© Uv y e© j, Ges mvaviYZ:cwimsL¨vbMZfv‡e m‡›`nc~Y© |

`xN© mg‡qi ‡mŠiZviZ‡gÏ cÖ fveUvI D`NvUb Kiv n‡q‡Q| mß`k kZvãxi ‡klw`‡K BD‡ivwcI ch© ‡e¶KMY msi¶YK… Z m~ ‡h© i `v‡Mi

NUbvejxi Abycw¯’ wZi ZvwjKv ‡i‡LwQ‡jb Ges Aóv`k kZvãxi ïiy i w`‡K wKQy cwÐZ e¨w³ ‡m¸‡jv‡K ‡mB mgqKv‡ji m~ h© `v‡Mi wµqvi msw¶ß weiwZ wnmv‡e ¯^ xK… Z mZïƒ‡c Dc¯’ vcb K‡i (‡hmgq Kvj‡K g¨vbwWqviwgwbgvg e‡j)| g¨vbwWqviwgwbgvg‡K BD‡iv‡ci A¯^ vfvweK VvÐvi GKUv Ask wnmv‡e hy ³ Kiv n‡q‡Q hv lô`k kZvãx ‡_‡K Dbwesk kZvãxi cÖ_g ch© šÍ we¯Í … Z wQj|g¨vbwWqviwgwbgv‡gi ev¯Í eZvGL‡bv cÖ Zxqgv‡bi A‡c¶vq, hvB‡nvK, we‡kl K‡I hLb Px‡bi ‡Lvjv

‡Pv‡Li ch© ‡e¶‡Kiv ‡mŠiwµqvi `wjjcÖ ¯Í Z Ki‡jv ‡mB mg‡qB GUvi wbqwgZ ‡f` ‡`Lv w ‡jv|weÁvbxiv Rjevqy msµvšÍ c‡iv¶ Z_¨ cix¶v K‡I `xN© ‡gqv`x ‡mŠicy bt AveZ©bkxjZvi cÖ gvY ‡c‡q‡Q, ‡hgb Avw` hy ‡Mi Mv‡Qi ej‡qi cy iæ‡Z¡ ¡ i dwmj ‡iKW© | GB M‡elYv, hvB‡nvK, ‡fŠMwjK Rjevqy Ges ‡mŠi wµqv P‡µi mv‡_ Awfbœ m‡›`nvZxZ ms‡hvM ¯’ vcb Ki‡Z, A_ev GgbwK P‡µi AZxZ AwfÁZvI wbwðZ Ki‡Z e¨_© nq| hw` avivevwnK Ges wbf© i‡hvM¨ f~ we`¨v I cÖ Zœ ZvwË¡ K msµvšÍ cÖ gvYvw` hv `~ i AZx‡Zi ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ‡K Aby miY K‡i‡Q ZvcvIqv ‡hZ, Zvn‡jI ‡mŠi c`v‡_© i GKUv ¸iæZ¡c~Y© wel‡qi mgvavb

Kiv ‡hZt wK fv‡e ‡mŠi wµqv‡K web¨vm Kiv hvq| eZ©gv‡b ‡mŠi wµqvi `y BwU web¨vm| cÖ_gUv g‡b K‡i ‡h m~ ‡h© i Avf¨šÍixY MwZ (N~ wY©I Pv‡ci Kvi‡Y m… ó) Bnvi wekvj gv‡ci Py ¤^ K ‡¶‡Îi mv‡_ wgwjZ

nq we`ÿr Drcv`K hš¿ (Wvqbv‡gv) ‰Zwi Kivi Rb¨, GUv GKUv wWfvBm ‡hLv‡b hvwš¿ K kw³‡K ‡PŠ¤^ K ‡¶‡Îi kw³‡Z iƒcvšÍ i Kiv nq| ms‡¶‡c, m~ ‡h©i GB wekvj ‡PŠ¤^ K kw³‡K ¯^ wbf© i Kiv, hv‡Z Zvi (m~ ‡h© i) PvwjZ ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ‡K wbqš¿Y Kiv hv mvwe© K fv‡e

mvgvb¨, m¤¢ eZ kZ ‡KvwU eQ‡ii ci cwieZ© b n‡e| weKí e¨L¨vq g‡b Kiv nq ‡h m~ ‡h©i GB wekvj ‡PŠ¤^ K ‡¶Î m~ ‡h© i ‡¶‡Îi GKUv Ask hv m~ ‡h© i DrcwËi mg‡q m… wó, Ges hv ¶q cÖ wZ‡iva¨ bq| GB web¨v‡m, ‡mŠi Kvh© µg wbf©ikxj m~ ‡h© i Py ¤^ K ‡¶Î ª y Z bó n‡q hvq| GBfv‡e, ‡mŠi wµqv P‡µi PvwiwÎK ‰ewkó¨ `xN© Kvj c‡i cwieZ© b nIqvi Avkv Kiv hvq| Avay wbK ‡mŠi ch©‡e¶Y Kvj Ly eB Aí GKUv mgq hv w`‡q Dcmsnv‡i ‡cŠQvb hv‡ebv ‡h eZ© gv‡bi cy btAveZ© bkxj ‡mŠi wµqv m~ ‡h© i GKwU `xN© ‡gqv‡` Ae¯’vb Kiv ‰ewkó¨ ev gvgy jx GKvUv ¶Y¯’ vqx NUbv|

17| ‡jLK cÖ v_wgK fv‡e ‡h wel‡q Av‡jvKcvZ K‡i‡Qb

(K) Dc¯’ vcb K‡i‡Qb y BwU cÖ wZØ›Øx ‰eÁvwbK Z‡Ë¡ i hv ‡mŠi wµqGes weewZ© Z f~ we`¨v msµvšÍ cÖ gvYvw` ‡h¸‡jv cÖ vqB Zv‡ì mg_

Kivi Rb¨ D×… Z Kiv nq|

(L) msw¶ß iƒc‡iLv w`‡q‡Qb ‡mŠi c`v‡_© i wKQy m`¨ ‰eÁvwbK Dbœq‡bi Ges fwel¨r AvenvIqv msµvšÍ M‡elYvq Gi cÖ fve g~ j¨vqb K‡i|

(M) Av‡jvPbv K‡i‡Qb ‡fŠMwjK NUbvejxi mv‡_ ‡mŠi wµqvi ms‡hv‡M RwoZ RwUjZv wb‡q Ges ‡mB mgm¨vi mgvavb ‡mŠic`v_© ‡evSvi ‡¶‡Î ‡h cÖ fve ‡dj‡Z cv‡i Zv wb‡ ©k K‡i|

(N) Zy ‡j a‡i‡Qb ‡mŠi wµqvi ‡fŠMwjK cÖwZwµqvi ‰eÁvwbK Aby mÜv‡bi wKQy ‡¶‡Îi wbõjZv wb‡q Ges wb‡f© Rvj c`v_© ‡Kw› «K M‡elYvi ¯^ v‡_© GUv cwiZ¨v‡Mi Rb¨ mycvwik K‡i‡Qb|

(O) ‡Kb ‡mŠi c`v‡_© i GKUv mgm¨v GL‡bv ch© šÍ mgvavb Kiv nqw

Zvi my wbw © ó KviY wPwýZ K‡i‡Qb Ges Avay wbK c`v_© we`‡ì A ZvwË¡ K cš’ v‡K Îy wUc~Y© e‡j‡Qb|

18| ‡mŠi wµqvi `y BwU web¨v‡mi g‡a¨ jvBb .................. ‡Z ‡h eY© bv ‡`qv n‡q‡Q Zv‡Z wb‡Pi ‡Kvb wee… wZUv mwVK?

(K) Dfq web¨v‡m cy btAveZ© bkxj ‡mŠi wµqv‡K m~ ‡h© i `xN© ‡gqv`x ‰ewkó hv kZ‡KvwU eQi c‡i mvgvb¨ cwieZ© b n‡e D‡jøL Kiv n‡q‡Q|

(L) Dfq web¨v‡m ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ‡K wekvj cwigv‡ci ‡mŠi Py ¤^K ‡¶‡Îi Dci wbfi« kxj wnmv‡e Kíbv Kiv n‡q‡Q|

(M) GKwU web¨v‡m ‡mŠi wµqvi Kvi‡bi Rb¨ m~ ‡hi« Py ¤^ K ‡¶Î fy wgKcvjb K‡i e‡j avibv Kiv nq, A_P Ab¨ web¨v‡m Zv bq|

(N) GKwU web¨v‡m Aby gvb Kiv nq ‡h ‡mŠi wµqv ‡fŠMwjK NUbvejx mv‡_ Am¤ú… ³, A_P Ab¨ web v‡m aviYv Kiv nq ‡h c… w_exi Dcch© ‡e¶Y‡hvM¨ cÖ fve i‡q‡Q|

(O) GKwU web¨v‡m cy btAveZ© bkxj ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ‡K K‡qK hy ‡Mi ‡P‡qI `xN© ‡K Am¤¢ e MY¨ Kiv nq, A_P Ab¨ web¨v‡m GB ai‡b Pµ‡K Aby gvb Kiv nq|

19| c¨v‡mR Aby hvqx, kß`k kZvãxi ‡kl Ges Aóv`k kZvãxi cÖ_ w`‡Ki Pxbv‡ì ‡iKW© wb‡gœ vwjwLZ ‡Kvb Kvi‡Y iæZ¡c~Y© ?

(K) Zviv civgk© ‡`q ‡h Z‡_ï wfwË‡Z g¨vbwWqvi wgwbgvg Aby gvb

Kiv n‡qwQj Zv mwVK wQj bv|(L) Zviv civgk© ‡`q ‡h g¨vbwWqvi wgwbgvg AvenvIqvi mv‡_ m¤ú…

n‡Z cv‡ibv|

(M) Zviv civgk© ‡`q ‡h g¨vbwWqvi wgwbgvg ïay gvÎ BD‡iv‡ci RbcÖ ‡hvR¨ n‡Z cv‡i|

(N) Zviv g¨vbwWqvi wgwbgv‡gi mgqKv‡j wek¦ e¨vcx A¯^ vfvweK VvÐv AvenvIqvi Aw¯Í Z¡ ¡cÖ gvY K‡i|

(O) Zviv cÖ gvY K‡I ‡h g¨vbwWqvi wgwbgvg Gi ‡mB mgqKv‡ji ‡mŠiwµqv Zvi eZ© gvb aiY ‡_‡K D‡jøL‡hvM¨nv‡i ZviZg¨ nqwb

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20| ‡jLK wb‡Pi ‡KvbwU‡K ey Sv‡Z ‡P‡q‡Qb hv eZ© gv‡b weivRgvb f~ we`¨v Ges cÖ ZœZvwË¡ K msµvšÍ cÖ gvY ‡hUv ‡mŠi wµqv P‡µi mv‡_ mswkø ó ?

(K) GUv ‡mŠi wµqv web¨vm‡K me‡P‡q fv‡jv mg_© b K‡i hv jvBb bs............ ‡Z eY© bv Kiv n‡q‡Q|

(L) GUv ‡mŠi wµqv web¨vm‡K me‡P‡q fv‡jv mg_© b K‡i hv jvBb............‡Z eY© bv Kiv n‡q‡Q|

(M) ‡mŠi wµqv web¨v‡mi ‡KvbUv‡KB wbwðZ Kivi Rb¨ Z… Zxqc¨vivM« v‡d hv eY© bv Kiv n‡q‡Q Zv ch© vß bq|

(N) Z… Zxq c¨vivM« v‡d ‡h fv‡e Dc ’ vcb Kiv n‡q‡Q Zv‡Z ‡mŠi wµqvi Dfq web¨v‡mi mv‡_ GUvi mvgÄm¨ ‡bB|

(O) GUv ‡fŠMwjK AvenvIqv Ges ‡mŠi wµqv ‡Kvb GKfv‡e m¤ú… ³GB ZË¡‡K fy j cÖ gvwbZ K‡i|

21| c¨v‡mR ‡_‡K GUv Aby gvb Kiv hvq ‡h web¨v‡mi ¯^c‡¶ jvBb............ ‡Z eY© bvi wb‡Pi ‡KvbwUi mZ¨Zv cvIqv ‡M‡j hy w³Uv AviI ‡Rviv‡jv n‡Zv ?

(K) `~ i AZx‡Z msNwUZ Zxe« Av‡Mœ qwMwii AMœ yrcvZ¸‡jv PµvKv‡i NU‡Zv hv‡ì AwZ`xN© cy btAveZ© bkxjZv wQj|

(L) eZ© gvb mg‡q wek¦ ch©v‡qi eR« S‡oi NUbv e… w× Ges n« vm PµvKv‡i nq hv Avby gvwbK 11 eQ‡i cy btAveZ© bkxj|

(M) `~ i AZx‡Z PµvKvi AvenvIqv cwieZ© b¸‡jv wQj 200 eQ‡ii AwaK cy btAveZ© bkxj|

(N) MZ kZ‡K m~ ‡hi« `vM P‡µi ‰`N © Gi Mo cy btAveZ© bkxj mgq11 eQ‡ii ‡P‡qI hZ`~ i m¤¢ e 2 eQi ZviZg¨ n‡qwQj e‡j Rvbv

hvq|

(O) kZ‡KvwU ermi Av‡M, ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ eZ© gvb w`‡bi ‡mŠi wµqv P‡µi g‡Zv GKB ai‡bi cy btAveZ© bkxj wQj|

22| c¨v‡mR ‡_‡K GUv Aby gvb Kiv hvq ‡h mß k kZvãxi ‡MvovGes Aóv`k kZvãxi cÖ vi‡¤¢ Pxbv‡ì m~ ‡h© i ch© ‡e¶Y

(K) wQj m‡›`nc~Y© Kvib AwaKvsk m~ ‡h© i `vM Lvwj ‡Pv‡L ‡`Lv ‡hZ bv|

(L) m¤¢ eZ GKB AvenvIqv cwi‡e‡k Kiv n‡qwQj ‡hfv‡e BD‡iv‡c Kiv n‡qwQj|

(M) GB mg‡q Kiv BD‡ivcxq‡ì ch© ‡e¶Y¸‡jvi ‡P‡qI AwaK wbf© i

‡hvM¨ wQj|(N) GB mg‡q wKQy m~ ‡h© i `vM wµqv ‡iKW© Kiv nq|

(O) weÁvbx‡ì Øviv wb‡qvM ‡`qv n‡qwQ‡jv hy w³ ‡Lvu Rvi Rb¨ ‡h ‡mŠi wµqvi cwieZ© b GB mg‡qB N‡UwQ‡jv|

23| c¨v‡mR ‡_‡K GUv Aby gvb Kiv ‡h‡Z cv‡i ‡h M‡elYvq Mv‡Qi ej‡qi cy iæË¡ eënv‡ii cÖ ‡Póvi gva¨‡g ‡mŠi cy btAveZ© bZv Ges ‡fŠMwjK AvenvIqvi g‡a¨ m¤¢ ve¨ ‡hvMm~ Î wbY© q wb‡gœ vwjwLZ ‡Kvbavibvi Dci wfwË K‡i?

(K) ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ e… ¶ ejq m… wói ‡mB mgq Kvj ‡_‡KB eZ© gvb Av`‡j we`¨gvb|

(L) Rxe ‰eÁvwbK wµqvi d‡j nIqv e… ‡¶i ea© b bvwZ`xN© AvenvIqai‡b cÖ fvweZ nqbv|

(M) e… ¶ ej‡qi Mo cy iæË¡ cÖ RvwZ ‡f‡` wfbœ nq|

(N) e… ¶ ej‡qi cy iæZ¡ ‡fŠMwjK AvenvIqvi cwieZ© b‡K cÖ wZdwjZ K‡i|

(O) ‡fŠMwjK AvenvIqv Ges ‡mŠi wµqv Pµ DfqB e… ¶ ej‡qicy iæZ¡ ‡K ‡nqvwj fv‡e cÖ fvweZ K‡i|

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


It is requently assumed that the mechanization o workhas a revolutionary effect on the lives o the people whooperate the new machines and on the society into whichthe machines have been introduced. For example, it hasbeen su

ousehold, their traditional sphere,

and undamentally altered their position in society. In thenineteenth century, when women began to enter actories,Jules Simon, a French politician, warned that by doing so,women would give up their emininity. Friedrich Engels,however, predicted that women would be liberated rom the“social, legal, and economic subordination” o the amilyby technological developments that made possible therecruitment o “the whole emale sex into public industry.”Observers thu ng the social desirabilityo mechanization’s effects, but they agreed that it wouldtransorm women’s lives.

Historians, particularly those investigating the historyo women, now seriously question this assumption o

transorming power. Tey conclude that such dramatictechnological

amatic social changes in women’seconomic position or in the prevailing evaluation o women’swork. Te employment o young women in textile millsduring the Industrial Revolution was largely an extensiono an older pattern o employment o young, single womenas domestics. It was not the change in office technology,but rather the separation o secretarial work; previouslyseen as an apprenticeship or beginning managers, romadministrative work that in the 1880’s created a new class o

“dead-end” jobs, thenceorth considered “women’s work.”Te increase in th

twentieth century had less to do withthe mechanization o housework and an increase in leisuretime or these women than it did with their own economicnecessity and with high marriage rates that shrank theavailable pool o single women workers, previously, in manycases, the only women employers would hire.

Women’s work has changed considerably in the past 200years, moving rom the household to the office or the actory,and later hite collar instead o blue collarwork. Fundamentally, however, the conditions under which

women work have changed little since beore the IndustrialRevolution: the segregation o occupations by gender,lower pay or women as a group, jobs that require relativelylow levels

men’s household laborremains demanding. Recent historical investigation hasled to a major revision o the notion that technology isalways inherently revolutionary in its effects on society.Mechanization may even have slowed any change in thetraditional position o women both in the labor market andin the home.

17. Which o the ollowing statements best summarizesthe main idea o the passage?

(A) Te effects o the mechanization o women’swork h quently heldassumption that new technology is inherentlyrevolutionary.

(B) Present studies have shown that mechanizationrevolutionizes a society’s traditional valuesand the customary roles o its members.

(C) Mecha ed the nature owomen’s work to change since the IndustrialRevolution.

(D) Te mechanization o work creates whole newclasses o jobs that did not previously exist.

(E) Te mechanization o women’s work, whileextremely revolutionary in its effects, has not,on the whole, had the deleterious effects thatsome critics had eared.

18. Te author mentions all o the ollowing inventionsas ex vationsEXCEP the

(A) sewing machine(B) vacuum cleaner(C) typewriter(D) telephone(E) spinning jenny

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that, beore theIndus o women’s

work was done in which o the ollowing settings?(A) extile mills(B) Private households(C) Offices(D) Factories(E) Small shops

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

Test 1.2 P1

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorwould consider which o the ollowing to be anindicatio heconditions o women’s work?

(A) Statistics showing that the majority o womennow occupy white collar positions

(B) Intervie ing thatthey are now doing some household tasks

(C) Surveys o the labor market documentingthe recent creation o a new class o jobsin workersoutnumber men our to one

(D) Census results showing that working women’swages and salaries are, on the average, as highas those o working men

(E) Enrollment figures rom universitiesdemonstrating that increasing numbers oyoung women

level

21. Te passage states that, beore the twentieth century,which o the ollowing was true o many employers?

(A) Tey did not employ women in actories.(B) Tey tended to employ sin

(C) Tey employed women in only those jobsthat were related to women’s traditionalhousehold work.

(D) Tey resisted technological innovations thatwould radically change women’s roles in the

amily.(E) Tey hired women only when qualified menwere not available to fill the open positions.

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authormost probably believes which o the ollowing tobe true concerning those historians who study thehistory o women?

(A) Teir work provides insights important to thoseexamining social phenomena affecting the

lives o both sexes.(B) Teir work

disciplines.(C) Because they concentrate only on the role o

women in the workplace, they draw morereliable conclusions than do other historians.

(D) While highly interesting, their work has nothad an impact on most historians’ currentassumptions concerning the revolutionaryeffect o technology in the workplace.

(E) Tey oppose the urther mechanization o workwhich, according to their findings, tends to

perpetuate existing inequalities in society.

23. Which o the ollowing best describes the unction othe concluding sentence o the passage?

(A) It sums up the general points concerning themechanization o work made in the passageas

ization o work which goesbeyond the evidence presented in the passageas a whole.

(C) It restates the point concerning technology

made in the sentence immediately precedingit.(D) It qualifies the authors agreement with scholars

who argue or a major revision in theassessment o the impact o mechanizationon society.

(E) It suggests a compromise between twoseemingly contradictory views concerningthe effects o mechanization on society.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

(Tis passage is excerpted rom an article that waspublished in 1982)

Warm blooded animals have elaboratedphysiological controls to maintain constant bodytemperature (in humans, 37° C). Why then during

sickness should temperature rise, apparently increasingstress on the inected organism? It has long been knownthat the level o serum iron in animals alls duringinection. Garibaldi first suggested a relationshipbetween ever and iron. He ound that microbialsynthesis o siderophores - substances that bindiron—in bacteria o the genus Salmonella declined atenvironmental temperatures above 37° C and stopped at40.3° C. Tus, ever would make it more difficult or aninecting bacteriu

used to test this hypothesisbecause their body temperature can be controlled in thelaboratory. Kluger reported that o iguanas inected with

the potentially lethal bacterium A. hydrophilia, moresurvived at temperatures o

er the lower temperature.When animals at 42° C were injected with an ironsolution, however, mortality rates increased significantly.Research to determine whether similar phenomenaoccur in warm-blooded animals is sorely needed.

24. Te passage is primarily c

(A) the role o siderophores in the synthesis oserum iron

(B) new tr ydrophilia

(C) the unction o ever in warm-blooded animals(D) the mechanisms that ensure constant body

temperature(E) iron utilization in coldblooded animals

25. According the ollowing?

(A) Tat serum iron is produced through microbialsynthesis

(B) Tat microbial synthesis o siderophores inWarm blooded animals is more efficient athig

nly iron bound to other substances can beused by bacteria

(D) Tat there is a relationship between the synt genus

Salmonella and environmental temperature(E) Tat bacteria o the genus Salmonella require

iron as a nutrient

26. Which o the ollowing can be inerred about warmblooded animals solely on the basis o inormation

(A) Te body temperatures o warm-blooded

laboratory.

(B) Warm-blooded animals require more iron inperiods o stress than they do at other tim

bleat an environmental temperature o 37° Cthan they are at a temperature o 42° C.

(D) In warm-blooded animals, bacteriaare responsible or the production osiderophores, which, in turn, make iron

(E) In warm-blooded animals, inections that leadto ever are usually traceable to bacteria.

27. I it were to be determined that “similar phenomenaoccuro the ollowing, assuming each is possible,

is likely to be the most effective treatment or warmblooded animals with bacterial inections?

(A) Aanimals’ body temperature

(B) Injecting the animals with an iron solution(C) Administering a medication that makes serum

iron unavailable to bacteria(D) Providing the animals with reduced iron diets(E) Keeping the animals in an environment with

temperatures higher than 37° C

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

Test 1.2 P2

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 1.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) D

19) B

20) D

21) B

22) A

23) B

SECOND PASSAGE

24) C

25) D

26) A

27) C

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

(Tis passage is rom an article published in 1973)

Te recent change to all volunteer armed orcesin the United States will eventually produce a gradualincrease in the proportion o women in the armed orcesand in the variety o women’s assignments, but probably

not the dramatic gains or women that might havebeen expected. Tis is so even though the armed orcesoperate in an ethos o institutional change orientedtoward occ

n are unlikely to be trained or any directcombat operations. A significant portion o the largersociety remains uncomortable as yet with extendingequality in this direction. Tereore, or women in themilitary, th

equivalence, not identity or even similarity otask. Opportunities seem certain to arise. Te growingemphasis on deterrence is bound to offer increasing

scope ort military assignments.


(A) pressignments available to women in the newUnited States all volunteer armed orces

(B) present a reasoned prognosis o the status owomen in the new United States all volunteerarmed orces

(C) present the new United States all volunteerarmed orces as a model case o equalemployment policies in action

(D) analyze reorms in the new United States all volunteer armed orces necessitated by the

ry(E) analyze the use o unctional equivalence as a

substitute or occupational equality in thenew United States all volunteer armed orces

18. According to the passage, despite the United Statesarmed orces’ commitment to occupational equalityor women in the military, certain other actorspreclude women’s

(A) receiving equal pay or equal work(B) having access to positions o responsibility at

ssignments than beore(D) benefiting rom opportunities arising rom new

noncombat unctions(E) being assigned all o the military tasks that are

assigned to men

19. Te passage implies that which o the ollowing is aactor conducive to a more equitable representationo women in the United States armed orces thanhas existed in t

er character o the present armedorces

(B) Te past service records o women who hadassignments unctionally equivalent to men’sassignments

(C) Te level o awareness on the part o the largersociety o military issues

(D) A decline in the proportion o deterrenceoriented noncombat assignments

(E) Restrictive past policies governing the militaryassignments open to women

20. Te “dramatic gains or women” (line 5) and theattitude, as described in lines 11-12 o a “significantportion o the larger society” are logically related toeach other

response to achievement o the ormer(B) the major reason or absence o the ormer(C) a precondition or any prospect o achieving the

ormer(D) a catalyst or a urther extension o the ormer(E) a reason or some o the ormer being lost again

Line

(5)

(10)

(15)

Test 2.1 P1

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


This page hasbeen deliberately left empty

for showing passage and questions together

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

O the thousands o specimens o meteorites ound onEarth and known to science; only about 100 are igneous;that is, they have undergone melting by volcanic action atsome time since the planets were first ormed. Tese igneousmeteorites are known as achondrites because they lackchondrules— small stony spherules ound in the thousands

o meteorites (called “chondrites”) composed primarily ounaltered minerals that condensed rom dust and gas at theorigin o the solar system. Achondrites are the only knownsamples o volcanic rocks originating outside the Earth-Moon system. Most are thought to have been dislodged byinter bod

ers, in solar orbit between Mars and Jupiter.Shergottites, the name given to three anomalous

achondrites so ar discovered on Earth, present scientistswith a genuine enigma. Shergottites crystallized rom moltenrock less than 1.1 billion years ago (some 3.5 billion yearslater than typical achondrites) and were presumably ejectedinto space when an object impacted on a body similar in

chemical composition to Earth.While most meteorites appear to derive rom

comparatively small bodies, shergottites exhibit propertiesthat indicate that their source was a large planet, conceivablyMars. In order t

mall as the Moon is so great that nometeorites o lunar origin have been discovered.

While some scientists speculate that shergottites deriverom Io (a volcanically active moon o Jupiter), recentmeasurements suggest that since Io’s surace is rich in

sulur and sodium, the chemical composition o its volcanicproducts would probably be unlike that o the shergottites.Moreover, any ragments dislodged rom Io by interbodyimpact would be unlikely to escape the gravitational pull oJupiter.

Te only other logical source o shergottites is Mars.Space-probe photographs indicate the existence o giant volcanoes on the Martian surace. From the small numbero impact craters that appear on Martian lava flows, one canestimate that the planet was volcanically active as recently asa hal-billion years ago—and may be active today. Te greatobjection to the Martian origin o shergottites is the absence

o lunar meteorites on Earth. An impact capable o ejectinga ragment o the Martian surace into an Earth intersectingorbit is even less probable than such an event on the Moon,in view o the Moon’s smaller size and closer proximity toEarth. A recent study suggests, however, that permarostices below the surace o Mars may have altered the effectso impact on it. I the ices had been rapidly vaporized by animpacting object, the expanding gases might have helpedthe ejected ragments reach escape velocity. Finally, analysesperormed by space probes show a remarkable chemicalsimilarity between Martian soil and the shergottites.

21. Te passage implies which o the ollowing aboutshergottites?

I. Tey are products o volcanic activity.II. Tey derive rom a planet larger than Earth.III. Tey come rom a planetary body with a

chemical composition similar to that o Io.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

22. According to the passage, a meteorite discovered onEarth is unlikely to have come rom a large planetor which o the ollowing reasons?

(A) Tere are ewer large planets in the solar systemthan there are asteroids.

(B) Most large planets have been volcanically

inactive or more than a billion years.(C) Te gravitational pull o a large planet would

probably prohibit ragments rom escaping itsorbit.

(D) Tere are no chondrites occurring naturallyon Earth and probably none on other largeplanets.

(E) Interbody impact is much rarer on large thanon small planets because o the density o theatmosphere on large planets.

23. Te passage suggests that the age o shergottites is

probably (A) still entirely undetermined(B) less than that o most other achondrites(C) about 3.5 billion years(D) the same as that o typical achondrites(E) greater than that o the Earth

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

Test 2.1 P2

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. According to the passage, the presence o condrulesin a meteorite indicates that the meteorite

(A) has probably come rom Mars(B) is older than the solar system itsel (C) has not been melted since the solar system

ormed

(D) is certainly less than 4 billion years old(E) is a small ragment o an asteroid

25. Te passage provides inormation to answer which othe ollowing questions?

(A) What is the precise age o the solar system?(B) How did shergottites get their name?(C) What are the chemical properties shared by

shergottites and Martian soils?(D) How volcanically active is the planet Jupiter?(E) What is a major eature o the Martian surace?

26. It can be inerred rom the passage that each othe ollowing is a consideration in determiningwhether a particular planet is a possible source oshergottites that have been discovered on EarthEXCEP the

(A) planet’s size

(B) planet’s distance rom Earth(C) strength o the planet’s field o gravity (D) proximity o the planet to its moons(E) chemical composition o the planet’s surace

27. It can be inerred rom the passage that mostmeteorites ound on Earth contain which o theollowing?

(A) Crystals(B) Chondrules(C) Metals(D) Sodium

(E) Sulur

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 2.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) E

19) A

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) A

22) C

23) B

24) C

25) E

26) D

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Line(5)

(10)

(15)

2.2. -1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Practically speaking, the artistic maturing o thecinema was the single-handed achievement o David W.Griffith (1875-1948). Beore Griffith, photography indramatic films consisted o little more than placing theactors beore a stationary camera and showing them inull length as they would have appeared on stage. From

the beginning o his career as a director, however, Griffith,because o his love o Victorian painting, employedcomposition. He conceived o the camera image as havinga oreground and a rear ground, as well as the middledistance preerred by most directors. By 1910 he wasusing close-ups to reveal significant details o the scene oro the acting and extreme long shots to achieve a sense ospectacle and distance. His appreciation o the camera’spossibilities produced novel dramatic effects. By splittingan event into

uctance o his producers, whoeared that the public would not be able to ollow a plotthat was made up o such juxtaposed images, Griffithpersisted, and experimented as well with other elementso cinematic syntax that have become standard eversince. Tese included the flashback, permitting broadpsychological and emotional exploration as well asnarrative that were not chronological, and the crosscutbetween two parallel actions to heighten suspense and

excitement. In thus exploiting ully the possibilities oediting, Griffith transposed devices o the Victoria novelto film and gave film mastery o time as well as space.

Besides developing the cinema’s language, Griffithimmensely broadened its range and treatment o subjects.His early output was remarkably eclectic: it includednot only the standard comedies, melodramas, Westerns,and thrillers, but also such novelties as adaptations romBrowning and ennyson, and treatments o social issues.As his successes mounted, his ambitions grew, and withthem the whole o American cinema. When he remadeEnoch Arden in 1911, he insisted that a subject o such

importance could not be treated in the then conventionallength o one reel. Griffith’s introduction o the Americanmade multi reel picture began an immense revolution.wo years later, Judith of Bethulia, an elaborate historicphilosophical spectacle, reached the unprecedentedlength o our reels, or one hour’s running time. Fromour contemporary viewpoint, the pretensions o this filmmay seem a trifle ludicrous, but at the time it provokedendless debate and discussion and gave a new intellectualrespectability to the cinema.


(A) discuss the importance o Griffith to thedevelopment o the cinema

(B) describe the impact on cinema o the flashbackand other editing innovations

(C) deplore the state o American cinema beore the

advent o Griffith(D) analyze the changes in the cinema wrought by

the introduction o the multireel film(E) document Griffith’s impact on the choice o

subject matter in American films

22. Te author suggests that Griffith’s film innovationshad a direct effect on all o the ollowing EXCEP

(A) film editing(B) camera work(C) scene composing(D) sound editing

(E) directing

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that beore 1910the normal running time o a film was

(A) 15 minutes or less(B) between 15 and 30 minutes(C) between 30 and 45 minutes(D) between 45 minutes and 1 hour(E) 1 hour or more

24. Te author asserts that Griffith introduced all o theollowing into American cinema EXCEP

(A) consideration o social issues(B) adaptations rom ennyson(C) the flashback and other editing techniques(D) photographic approaches inspired by Victorian

painting(E) dramatic plots suggested by Victorian theater

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

2.2. -2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


25. Te author suggests that Griffith’s contributions tothe cinema had which o the ollowing results?

I. Literary works, especially Victorian novels,became popular sources or film subjects.

II. Audience appreciation o other film directors’experimentations with cinematic syntax was

increased.III. Many o the artistic limitations thought to be

inherent in filmmaking were shown to be reallynonexistent.

(A) II only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III only

26. It can be inerred rom the passage that Griffithwould be most likely to agree with which o theollowing statements?

(A) Te good director will attempt to explore newideas as quickly as possible.

(B) Te most important element contributing to a

film’s success is the ability o the actors.(C) Te camera must be considered an integral and

active element in the creation o a film.(D) Te cinema should emphasize serious and

sober examinations o undamental humanproblems.

(E) Te proper composition o scenes in a filmis more important than the details o theirediting.

27. Te author’s attitude toward photography in thecinema beore Griffith can best be described as

(A) sympathetic(B) nostalgic(C) amused(D) condescending(E) hostile

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 2.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) E

18) C

19) D

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) A

22) D

23) A

24) E

25) B

26) C

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

(Tis passage is excerpted rom an article that waspublished in 1981)

Te deep sea typically has a sparse aunadominated by tiny worms and crustaceans, with aneven sparser distribution o larger animals. However,

near hydrothermal vents, areas o the ocean wherewarm water emerges rom subterranean sources, liveremarkable densities o huge clams, blind crabs, and fish.

Most deep-sea aunas rely or ood on particulatematter, ultimately derived rom photosynthesis, allingrom above. Te ood supplies necessary to sustain thelarge vent communities, however, must be many timesthe ordinary allout. Te first reports describing ventaunas proposed two possible sources o nutrition:bacterial chemosynthesis, production o ood bybacteria using energy derived rom chemical changes,and advection, the drifing o ood materials romsurrounding regions. Later, evidence in support o the

idea o intense local chemosynthesis was accumulated:hydrogen sulfide was ound in vent water; many vent-sitebacteria were ound t

a were typical o vent outflow,then ood within the vent would dwar any contributionrom advection. Hence, the widely quoted conclusionwas reached that bacterial chemosynthesis providesthe oundation or hydrothermal-vent ood chains—anexciting prospect because no other communities on

Earth are independent o photosynthesis.Tere are, however, certain difficulties with this

interpretation. For example, some o the large sedentaryorganisms associated with vents are also ound atordinary deep-sea temperatures many meters romthe nearest hydrothermal sources. Tis suggests thatbacterial chemosynthesis is not a sufficient source onutrition or these creatures. Another difficulty is thatsimilarly dense populations o large deep-sea animalshave been ound in the proximity o “smokers”—ventswhere water emerges at temperatures up to 350° C. Nobacteria can survive such heat, and no bacteria were

ound there. Unless smokers are consistently locatednear more hospitable warm-water vents, chemosynthecan account or only a raction o the vent aunas. Itis conceivable, however, that these large, sedentaryorganisms do in act eed on bacteria that grow in warmwater vents, rise in the vent water, and then rain in

peripheral areas to nourish animals living some distanrom the warm-water vents.Nonetheless, advection is a more likely alternative

ood source. Research has demonstrated that advectiveflow, which originates near the surace o the oceanwhere suspended particulate matter accumulates,transports some o that matter and water to the vents.Estimates suggest that or every cubic meter o ventdischarge, 350 milligrams o particulate organic materiwould be advected into the vent area. Tus, or anaverage-sized vent, advection could provide more than30 kilograms o potential ood per day. In addition, it ilikely that small live animals in the advected water mig

be killed or stunned by thermal and/or chemical shockthereby contributing to the ood supply o vents.

16. Te passage provides inormation or answeringwhich o the ollowing questions?

(A) What causes warm-water vents to orm?(B) Do vent aunas consume more than do deep-sea

aunas o similar size?(C) Do bacteria live in the vent water o smokers?(D) What role does hydrogen sulfide play in

chemosynthesis?(E) What accounts or the locations o deep-sea

smokers?

3.1. -1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

(60)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


17. Te inormation in the passage suggests that themajority o deep-sea aunas that live in non venthabitats have which o the ollowing characteristics?

(A) Tey do not normally eed on particles o oodin the water.

(B) Tey are smaller than many vent aunas.

(C) Tey are predators.(D) Tey derive nutrition rom a chemosynthetic

ood source.(E) Tey congregate around a single main ood

source.


(A) describe a previously unknown naturalphenomenon

(B) reconstruct the evolution o a naturalphenomenon

(C) establish unequivocally the accuracy o a

hypothesis(D) survey explanations or a natural phenomenon

and determine which is best supported byevidence

(E) entertain criticism o the author’s research andprovide an effective response

19. Which o the ollowing does the author citeas a weakness in the argument that bacterialchemosynthesis provides the oundation or theood chains at d

ain sufficient quantitieso hydrogen sulfide.

(C) Bacteria cannot produce large quantities oood quickly enough.

(D) Large concentrations o minerals are ound in vent water.

(E) Some bacteria ound in the vents are incapableo chemosynthesis.

20. Which o the ollowing is inormation suppliedin the passage that would support the statementthat the ood supplies necessary to sustain ventcommunities must be many times that o ordinaryallout?

I. Large vent aunas move rom vent to vent in

search o ood.II. V

eep-sea areas.(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

21. Te author reers to “smokers” (line 38) most

probably in order to(A) show how thermal shock can provide ood or

some vent aunas by stunning small animals(B) prove that the habitat o most deep-sea animals

is limited to warm-water vents(C) explain how bacteria carry out chemosynthesis(D) demonstrate how advection compensates or

the lack o ood sources on the seafloor(E) present evidence that bacterial chemosynthesis

may be an inadequate source o ood orsome vent aunas

22. Which o the ollowing can be inerred rom thepassage about the particulate matter that is canneddown rom the surace o the ocean?

(A) It is the basis o bacterial chemosynthesis in the vents.

(B) It may provide an important source o nutritionor vent aunas.

(C) It may cause the internal temperature o the vents to change significantly.

(D) It is transported as large aggregates o particles.(E) It contains hydrogen sulfide.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Troughout human history there have been manystringent taboos concerning watching other peopleeat or eating in the presence o others. Tere havebeen attempts to explain these taboos in terms oinappropriate social relationships either between thosewho are involved and those who are not simultaneously

involved in

recious and the on-lookersso hungry, not to offer hal o the little ood one hadwas unthinkable, since every glance was a plea or lie.Further, during those times, people existed in nuclearor extended amily groups, and the sharing o ood wasquite literally supporting one’s amily or, by extension,preserving one’s sel.

23. I the argument in the passage is valid, taboos againsteating in the presence o others who are not alsoeating would be LEAS likely in a society that

(A) had always had a plentiul supply o ood(B) emphasized the need to share worldly goods(C) had a nomadic rather than an agricultural way

o lie(D) emphasized the value o privacy (E) discouraged overindulgence

24. Te author’s hypothesis concerning the origino taboos against watching other people eatemphasizes the

(A) general palatability o ood(B) religious significance o ood(C) limited availability o ood(D) various sources o ood(E) nutritional value o ood

25. According to the passage, the author believes thatpast attempts to explain some taboos concerningeating are

(A) unimaginative(B) implausible(C) inelegant

(D) incomplete(E) unclear

26. In developing the main idea o the passage, theauthor does which o the ollowing?

(A) Downplays earlier attempts to explain theorigins o a social prohibition.

(B) Adapts a scientific theory and applies it to aspiritual relationship.

(C) Simplifies a complex biological phenomenon byexplaining it in terms o social needs.

(D) Reorganizes a system designed to guide

personal behavior.(E) Codifies earlier, unsystematized conjectures

about amily lie.

3.1. -2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 3.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

16) C

17) B

18) D

19) A

20) B

21) E

22) B

SECOND PASSAGE

23) A

24) C

25) D

26) A

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

3.2. -1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

3.2. -2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 3.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) E

19) C

20) D

21) A

22) B

23) C

SECOND PASSAGE

24) C

25) A

26) A

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

4.1. -1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

4.1. -2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 4.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) B

19) E

20) D

SECOND PASSAGE

21) C

22) D

23) E

24) A

25) B

26) D

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4.2 -1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

4.2 -2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 4.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) E

19) C

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) D

23) A

24) C

25) C

26) B

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

5.1 -1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

5.1 -2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 5.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) C

19) A

20) C

21) E

22) C

23) A

SECOND PASSAGE

24) C

25) A

26) D

27) A

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

5.2 -1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

5.2 -2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 5.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) E

19) D

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) B

23) C

24) A

25) C

26) C

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

6.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 6.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) D

19) A

20) C

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) A

23) E

24) C

25) A

26) B

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

6.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

6.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 6.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) E

18) B

19) E

20) C

21) E

22) D

23) B

24) C

SECOND PASSAGE

25) E

26) A

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

7.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

7.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 7.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) E

18) D

19) C

SECOND PASSAGE

20) E

21) E

22) B

23) D

24) A

25) E

26) A

27) A

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


7.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

(60)

7.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 7.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) E

19) C

SECOND PASSAGE

20) C

21) D

22) D

23) D

24) A

25) E

26) E

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

8.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 8.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) C

19) C

20) C

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) A

23) B

24) C

25) E

26) A

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

8.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 8.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) B

19) A

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) C

23) C

24) D

25) E

26) A

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


9.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

9.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 9.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) A

19) D

20) E

SECOND PASSAGE

21) A

22) D

23) B

24) E

25) A

26) A

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


9.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

9.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 9.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) D

19) E

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) B

23) A

24) B

25) A

26) D

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Te 1960’s witnessed two proound socialmovements: the civil rights movement and themovement protesting the war in Vietnam. Althoughthey overlapped in time, they were largely distinct. For abrie moment in 1967, however, it appeared that the twomoveme

tnam War cannot be explained in termso pacifism alone. Afer all, he was something o alatecomer to the antiwar movement, even though by1965 he was convinced that the role o the United Statesin the war was indeensible. Why then the two years thatpassed beore he translated his private misgivings intopublic dissent? Perhaps he believed that he could notcriticize American oreign policy without endangeringthe support or civil rights that he had won rom the

ederal government.

17. According to the passage, the delay reerred to inlines 12-15 is perhaps attributable to which o theollowing?

(A) King’s ambivalence concerning the role o theUnited States in the war in Vietnam

(B) King’s attempts to consolidate support or hisleadership within the civil rights movement

(C) King’s desire to keep the leadership o the civilrights movement distinct rom that o theantiwar movement

(D) King’s desire to draw support or the civil rightsmovement rom the leadership o the antiwar‘ movement

(E) King’s reluctance to jeopardize ederal supportor the civil rights movement

18. Te author supports the claim that “King’s stance onthe Vietnam War cannot be explained in terms opacifism alone” (lines 10-12) by implying which othe ollowing?

(A) Tere is little evidence that King was ever astudent o pacifist doctrine.

(B) King, despite pacifist sympathies, was notconvinced that the policy o the ederalgovernment in Vietnam was wrong.

(C) King’s belie in nonviolence was ormulated interms o domestic policy rather than in termso international issues.

(D) Had King’s actions been based on pacifismalone, he would have joined the antiwarmovement earlier than he actually did.

(E)

r need or support.

19. Which o the ollowing can be inerred rom thepassage about the movement opposing the war inVietnam?

(A) It preceded the civil rights movement.(B) It began in 1965.(C) It was supported by many who otherwise

opposed public dissent.(D) It drew support rom most civil rights leaders.(E) It was well underway by 1967.

20. Which o the ollowing best describes the passage?

(A) It discusses an apparent inconsistency andsuggests a reason or it.

(B) It outlines a sequence o historical events.(C) It shows why a commonly held view is

inaccurate.(D) It evaluates an explanation and finally accepts

that explanation.(E) It contrasts two views o an issue.

10.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

What causes a helix in nature to appear with either adextral (“right handed,” or clockwise) twist or a sinistral(“lef handed,” or counterclockwise) twist is one o themost intriguing puzzles in the science o orm. Most spiral-shaped snail species are predominantly dextral. But at onetime, handedness (twist direction o the shell) was equally

distributed within some snail species that have becomepredominantly dextral or, in a ew species, predominantlysinistral. What mechanisms control handedness and keep lefhandedness rare?

It would seem unlikely that evolution should discriminateagainst sinistral snails i sinistral and dextral snails are exactmirror images, or any disadvantage that a sinistral twist initsel could coner on its posses

ded snails cannot mate with

each other, having incompatible twist directions. Presumablyan individual o the rarer orm would have relative difficultyin finding a mate o the same hand, thus keeping the rare ormrare or creating geographically separated right and lef handedpopulations.

m combining dissymmetry,anatomy, and chance does not provide an adequate explanationo why right handedness should have become predominant.It does not explain, or example, why the inrequent unionsbetween snails o opposing hands produce ewer offspringo the rarer than the commoner orm in species where eachparent contributes equally to hande

determines handedness, abrood is not exclusively right or lef handed when the offspringwould have the same genetic predisposition. In the Europeanpond snail Lymnaea peregra, a predominantly dextral specieswhose handedness is maternally determined, a brood mightbe expected to be exclusively right or lef handed—and thisofen occurs. However, some broods possess a ew snails othe opposing hand, and in predom

gly high.Here, the evolutionary theory must deer to a theory

based on an explicit developmental mechanism that can avoreither right or lef handedness. In the case o Lymnaea peregra,

studies indicate that a dextral gene is expressed during eggormation; i.e., beore egg ertiliza

the egg that controls thepattern o cell division and thus handedness. In experiments,an injection o cytoplasm rom dextral eggs changes thepattern o sinistral eggs, but an injection rom sinistral eggsdoes not influence dextral eggs. One explanation or thediffering effects is that all Lymnaea peregra eggs begin lefhanded but most switch to being right handed. Tus, the pathto a solution to the puzzle o handedness in all snails appears tobe as twisted as the helix itsel.

21. Which o the ollowing would serve as an exampleo “concomitant structural eatures” (line 18) thatmight disadvantage a snail o the rarer orm?

(A) A shell and body that are an exact mirror im

(C) A chip or racture in the shell caused by anobject alling on it

(D) A pattern on the shell that better camouflages it(E) A smaller shell opening that restricts mobility

and imoner orm

22. Te second paragraph o the passage is primarilyconcerned with offering possible reasons why

(A) it is unlikely that evolutionary mechanismscould discriminate against sinistral snails

(B) sinistrality is relatively uncommon among snailspecies

(C) dextral and sinistral populations o a snailspecies ten

ly accounts or the predominance

o dextrality across snail species(E) dextral snails breed more readily than sinistral

snails, even within predominantly sinistralpopulations

23. In describing the “evolutionary mechanism” (line

25), the author mentions which o the ollowing?(A) Te avorable conditions or nurturing new

offspring(B) Te variable environmental conditions that

affect survival o adult snails(C) Te availability o potential mates or breeding(D) Te structur

nd(E) Te requency o unions between snails o

different species

10.1 - 2nd

ne5)

0)

5)

0)

5)

0)

5)

0)

5)

0)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. According to the passage, which o the ollowing istrue o Lymnaea peregral ?

(A) Handedness within the species was at one timeequally distributed between lef and right.

(B) Under laboratory conditions, dextral eggs romLymnaea peregra can be artificially induced to

de

ation, exclusively sinistral or dextral(D) Handedness in Lymnaea peregra offspring is

determined by only one o the parents.(E) Geographic actors have played a larger role

than has genetics is the evolution o thespecies.

25. Te passage implies that in Lymnaea peregra, therewill generally be

(A) more offspring o the nondominant hand in

broods where handedness is determined afer,rather than beore, ertilization

(B) a sinistral ge the egg cell

(C) ewer sinistral offspring in dextral broods thandextral offspring in sinistral broods

(E) equal numbers o exclusively lef and righthanded broods

(F) an increasing occurrence o lef handedness insuccessive broods

26. It can be inerred rom the passage that apredominantly sinistral snail species might staypredominantly sinistral or each o the ollowingreasons EXCEP or

(A) a developmental mechanism that affects thecell-

pecies

(C) a relatively small number o snails o the samehand or dextral snails o the species to matewith

(D) anatomical incompatibility that preventsmating between snails o opposing handswithin the species

(E) geographic separation o sinistral and dextralpopulations

27. Which o the ollowing accurately describes the

relationship between the evolutionary and develop

sion, each is based on different

assumptions.(B) Tey present contradictory explanations o the

same phenomenon.(C) Te second theory accounts or certain

phenomena that the first cannot explain.(D) Te second th

cal and interchangeable in that

the second theory merely restates the first inless technical terms.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 10.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) E

18) D

19) E

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) E

22) B

23) C

24) D

25) C

26) B

27) C

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Recently some scientists have concluded thatmeteorites ound on Earth and long believed to have aMartian origin might actually have been blasted ree oMars’s gravity by the impact on Mars o other meteorites.Tis conclusion has led to another question: whethermeteorite impacts on Earth have similarly driven rocks

rom this planet to Mars.According to astronomer S.A. Phinney, kicking arock hard enough to ree it rom Earth’s gravity wouldrequire a meteorite capable o making a crater more than60 miles across. Moreover, even i Earth rocks were reedby meteorite impact, Mars’s orbit is much larger thanEarth’s, so Phinney estimates that the probability o theserocks hitting Mars is about one-tenth as great as that oMars’s rocks hitting Earth. o demonstrate this estimate,Phinney used a comp

ound that 17 o the 1,000particles would hit Mars.

17. Te passage is primarily concerned with

(A) presenting an argument to support a particularhypothesis

(B) suggesting an answer to a theoretical question(C) questioning the assumptions o a research

project(D) criticizing experimental results(E) explaining the origin o certain scientific data

18. According to the passage, which o the ollowingevents may have initiated the process that led to thepresence on Earth o meteorites rom Mars?

(A) A meteorite struck the Earth with tremendous velocity.

(B) A meteorite collided with Mars.(C) Approximately 1,000 rocks were ejected rom

Mars.(D) Te orbits o Earth and Mars brought the

planets to their closest points.(E) Rocks rom a meteorite impact broke ree o

Earth’s gravity.

19. Te passage suggests that which o the ollowingis true concerning the probability that a rock, iejected rom Mars, will hit the Earth?

(A) Te probability is increased when particles areejected rom Mars in random directions.

(B) Te probability is increased by the presence o

large craters on the surace o Mars.(C)Te probability is decreased when Mars’s orbit

brings the planet close to Earth.(D) Te probability is greater than, the probability

that a rock rom Earth will hit Mars.(E) Te probability is less than the probability that a

rock rom Earth will escape Earth’s gravity.

20. Which o the ollowing, i true, would cast mostdoubt on Phinney’s estimate o the probability oEarth rocks hitting Mars?

(A) Rather

rcent o all particles ejected rom Earthgo in the same direction into space.

(B) Approximately 100 meteorites large enough tomake a noticeable crater hit the Earth eachyear.

(C) No rocks o Earth origin have been detected onMars. ,

(D) Te velocity o rocks escaping rom Earth’sgravity is lower than the velocity ometeorites hitting the Earth. .

(E) No craters more than 60 miles across have beenound on Mars.

10.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

A “scientistic” view o language was dominantamong philosophers and linguists who affected todevelop a scientific analysis o human thought andbehavior in the early part o this century. Under theorce o this view, it was perhaps inevitable that theart o rhetoric should pass rom the status o being

regarded as o questionable worth (because althoughit might be both a source o pleasure and a means tourge people to right action, it might also be a means todistort truth and a source o misguided action) to thestatus o being wholly condemned. I people are regardedonly as machines guided by logic, as they were by these“scientistic” thinkers, rhetoric is likely to be held in lowregard; or the

estly conceived, always has a basis inreasoning. Logical argument is the plot, as it were, oany speech or essay that is respectully intended to

persuade people. Yet it is a characterizing eature orhetoric that it goes beyond this and appeals to theparts o our nature that are involved in eeling, desiring,acting, and suffering. It recalls relevant instances o theemotional reactions o people to circumstances—realor fictional—that are similar to our own circumstances.Such is the purpose o both historical accounts andables in persuasive discourse: they indicate literally orsymbolically how people may react emotionally, withhope or ear, to particular circumstances. A speechattempting to persuade people can achieve little unlessit takes into account the aspect o their being related to

such hopes and ears.Rhetoric, then, is addressed to human beings living

at particular times and in particular places. From thepoint o view o rhetoric, we are not merely logicalthinking machines, creatures abstracted rom timeand space. Te study o rhetoric should thereore beconsidered the most humanistic o the humanities, sincerhetoric is not directed only to our rational selves. Ittakes into account what the “scientistic” view leaves out.I it is a weakness to harbor eelings, then rhetoric maybe thought o as dealing in weakness. But those whoreject the idea o rhetoric because they believe it deals

in lies and who at the same time hope to move people toaction, must either be liars themselves or be very naive;pure logic has never been a motivating orce unless ithas been subordinated to human purposes, eelings, anddesires, and thereby ceased to be pure logic.

21. According to the passage, to reject rhetoric and stillhope to persuade people is -

(A) an aim o most speakers and writers(B) an indication either o dishonesty or o credulity(C) a way o displaying distrust o the audience’s

motives

(D) a characteristic o most humanistic discourse(E) a way o avoiding excessively abstract reasoning

22. It caneenth century rhetoric was regarded as

(A) the only necessary element o persuasivediscourse

(B) a dubious art in at least two ways(C) an outmoded and tedious amplification o logic(D) an open offense to the rational mind(E) the most important o the humanistic studies

23. Te passage suggests that the disparagement orhetoric by some people can be traced to their

(A) reaction against science(B) lack o training in logic(C) desire to persuade people as completely as

possible(D) misunderstanding o the use o the term

“scientistic”(E) view o human motivation

24. Te passage suggests that a speech that attempts topersuade people to act is likely to ail i it does NO

(A) distort the truth a little to make it moreacceptable to the audience

(B) appeal to the sel-interest as well as thehumanitarianism o the audience

(C) address listeners’ emotions as well as theirintellects .

(D) concede the logic o other points o view (E) show how an immediately desirable action is

consistent with timeless principles

25. Te passage suggests that to consider people as“thinking machines” (line 36) is to consider them as

(A) beings separated rom a historical context(B) replaceable parts o a larger social machine(C) more complex than other animals(D) liars rather than honest people(E) inallible in their reasoning

10.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


26. Which o the ollowing persuasive devices is NOused in the passage?

(A) A sample o an actual speech delivered by anorator

(B) Te contrast o

seeks to explain logicalargument

(E) Evaluative or judgmental words

27. Which o the ollowing best states the author’s mainpoint about logical argument?

(A) It is a sterile, abstract discipline, o little use inreal lie.

(B) It is an essential element o persuasivediscourse, but only one such element.

(C) It is an important means o persuading peopleto act against their desires.

(D) It is the lowest order o discourse because it isthe least imaginative.

(E) It is essential to persuasive discourse because itdeals with universal truths.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 10.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) B

19) D

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) B

23) E

24) C

25) A

26) A

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


(Te article rom which the passage was taken appearedin 1982)

Teorists are divided concerning the origin o theMoon. Some hypothesize that the Moon was ormedin the same w

hypothesis is thequestion o how a satellite ormed in this way could havesettled into the nearly circular orbit that the Moon hastoday. Fortunately, the collision hypothesis is testable.I it is true, the mantle rocks o the Moon and the Earth

should be the same geochemically.


(A) present two hypotheses concerning the origino the Moon

(B) discuss the strengths and weaknesses o thecollision hypothesis concerning the origin othe Moon

(C) propose that hypotheses concerning the Moon’sorigin be tested

(D) argue that the Moon could not have beenormed out o the typical planet orming-materials o the presolar nebula

(E) describe one reason why the Moon’sgeochemical makeup should resemble that othe Earth

18. According to the passage, Mars and the Earth aresimilar in which o the ollowing ways?

I. Teir satellites were ormed by collisions withother celestial bodies.

II. Teir cores contain iron.III. Tey were ormed rom the presolar nebula.(A) III only (B) I and II only (C) I and III only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

19. Te author implies that a nearly circular orbit isunlikely or a satellite that

(A) circles one o the inner planets(B) is deficient in iron(C) is different rom its planet geochemically (D) was ormed by a collision between two celestial

bodies(E) was ormed out o the planet orming-materials

in the presolar nebula

20. Which o the ollowing, i true, would be most likelyto make it difficult to veriy the collision hypothesisin the manner suggested by the author?

(A) Te Moon’s core and mantlerock are almostinactive geologically.

(B) Te mantlerock o the Earth has changed incomposition since the ormation o theMoon, while the mantlerock o the Moon has

remained chemically inert.(C) Much o the Earth’s iron ell to the Earth’s core

long beore the ormation o the Moon, aferwhich the Earth’s mantlerock remainedunchanged.

(D) Certain o the Earth’s elements, such asplatinum, gold, and iridium, ollowed iron tothe Earth’s core.

(E) Te mantlerock o the Moon contains elementssuch as platinum, gold, and iridium.

11.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Surprisingly enough, modern historians have rarelyinterested themselves in the history o the AmericanSouth in the period beore the South began to becomesel-consciously and distinctively “Southern”—the decadesafer 1815. Consequently, the cultural history o Britain’sNorth American empire in the seventeenth and eighteenth

centuries has been written almost as i the Southerncolonies had never existed. Te American culture thatemerged during the Colonial and Revolutionary eras hasbeen depicted as having been simply an extension o NewEngland Puritan culture. However, Proessor Davis hasrecently argued that the South stood apart rom the resto American society during this early period, ollowing itsown unique pattern o cultural development. Te case orSouthern distinctiveness rests upon two related premises:first, that the cultura

e impressive than the differences,and second, that what made those colonies alike also madethem different rom the other colonies. Te first, or which

Davis offers an enormous amount o evidence, can beaccepted without major reservations; the second is ar moreproblematic.

What makes the second premise problematic is theuse o the Puritan colonies as a basis or comparison. Qui

ibed by historians to the Puritans in the ormation oAmerican culture. Yet Davis inadvertently adds weightto such ascriptions by using the Puritans as the standardagainst which to assess the achievements and contributionso Southern colonials. Troughout, Davis ocuses onthe important, and undeniable, differences between the

Southern and Puritan colonies in motives or and patternso early settlement, in attitudes toward nature and NativeAmericans, and in the degree o receptivity to metropolitancultural influences.

However, recent scholarship has strongly suggestedthat

ious orientation and the communal impulse, werenot even typical o New England as a whole, but werelargely confined to the two colonies o Massachusetts andConnecticut. Tus, what in contrast to the Puritan coloniesappears to Davis to be peculiarly Southern—acquisitiveness,

a strong interest in politics and the law, and a tendency tocultivate metropolitan cultural models - was not only moretypically English than the cultural patterns exhibited byPuritan Massachusetts and Connecticut, but also almostcertainly characteristic o most other early modern Britishcolonies rom Barbados north to Rhode Island and NewHampshire. Within the larger ramework o Americancolonial lie, then, not the Southern but the Puritan coloniesappear to have been distinctive, and even they seem to havebeen rapidly assimilating to the dominant cultural patternsby the late Colonial period.

21. Te author is primarily concerned with

(A) reuting a claim about the influence o Puritanculture on the early American South

(B) reuting a thesis about the distinctiveness o theculture o the early American South

(C) reuting the two premises that underlie Davis’

discussion o the culture o the AmericanSouth in the period beore 1815

(D) challenging the hypothesis that early Americanculture was homogeneous in nature

(E) challenging the contention that the AmericanSouth made greater contributions to earlyAmerican culture than Puritan New Englanddid

22. Te passage implies that the attitudes toward NativeAmericans that prevailed in the Southern colonies

(A) were in conflict with the cosmopolitan outlook

o the South ,(B) derived rom Southerners’ strong interest in the

law (C) were modeled afer those that prevailed in the

North(D) differed rom those that prevailed in the

Puritan colonies(E) developed as a response to attitudes that

prevailed in Massachusetts and Connecticut

23. According to the author, the depiction o Americanculture during the Colonial and Revolutionary eras

as an extension o New England Puritan culturereflects the

(A) act that historians have overestimatedthe importance o the Puritans in thedevelopment o American culture

(B) act that early American culture was deeplyinfluenced by the strong religious orientationo the colonists

(C) ailure to recognize important and undeniablecultural differences between New Hampshireand Rhode Island on the one hand and theSouthern colonies on the other

(D) extent to which Massachusetts and Connecticutserved as cultural models or the otherAmerican colonies.

(E) extent to which colonial America resistedassimilating cultural patterns that weretypically English

11.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Te author o the passage is in agreement with whicho the ollowing elements o Davis’ book?

I. Davis’ claim that acquisitiveness was acharacteristic unique to the South during theColonial period

at there were significant

differences between Puritan and Southernculture during the Colonial period

III. Davis’ thesis that the Southern colonies shared acommon culture

(A) I only (B) II only (C) III only (D) I and II only (E) II and III only

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorwould find Davis’ second premise (lines 18-19)

more plausible i it were true that(A) Puritan culture had displayed the tendency

characteristic o the South to cultivatemetropolitan cultural models

(B) Puritan culture had been dominant in allthe Non-Southern colonies during theseventeenth and eighteenth centuries

(C) the communal impulse and a strong religiousorientation had been more prevalent in theSouth

(D) the various cultural patterns o the Southerncolonies had more closely resembled each

other(E) the cultural patterns characteristic o mostearly modern British colonies had also beencharacteristic o the Puritan colonies

26. Te passage suggests that by the late Colonial periodthe tendency to cultivate metropolitan culturalmodels was a cultural pattern that was

(A) dying out as Puritan influence began to grow (B) sel-conscious

(E) beginning to spread to Rhode Island and NewHampshire

27. Which o the ollowing statements could mostlogically ollow the last sentence o the passage?

(A) Tus, had more attention been paid to theevidence, Davis would not have beentempted to argue that the culture o the Southdiverged greatly rom Puritan culture in theseventeenth century.

(B) Tus, convergence, not divergence, seems tohave characterized the cultural developmento the American colonies in the eighteenthcentury.

(C) Tus, without the cultural diversity representedby the American South, the culture ocolonial America would certainly have beenhomogeneous in nature.

(D) Tus, the contribution o Southern colonialsto American culture was certainlyovershadowed by that o the Puritans.

(E) Tus, the culture o America during the

Colonial period was ar more sensitiveto outside influences than historians areaccustomed to acknowledge.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 11.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) D

19) D

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) D

23) A

24) E

25) B

26) C

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

For some time scientists have believed that cholesterolplays a major role in heart disease because people withamilial hypercholesterolemia, a genetic deect, havesix to eight times the normal level o cholesterol intheir blood and they invariably develop heart disease.Tese people lack cell-surace receptors or low-density

lipoproteins (LDL’s), which are the undamental carrierso blood cholesterol to the body cells that use cholesterol.Without an adequate number o cell-surace receptorsto remove LDL’s rom the blood, the cholesterol carryingLDL’s remain in the blood, increasing blood cholesterollevels. Scientists also noticed that people with amilialhypercholesterolemia appear to produce more LDL’s thannormal individuals. How, scientists wondered, could agenetic mutati

the blood also result in an increase in thesynthesis o this cholesterol carrying protein?

Since scientists could not experiment on human bodytissue, their knowledge o amilial hypercholesterolemia

was severely limited. However, a breakthrough came inthe laboratories o Yoshio Watanabe o Kobe Universityin Japan in 1980. Watanabe noticed that a male rabbitin his colony had ten times the normal concentrationo cholesterol in its blood. By appropriate breeding,Watanabe obtained a strain o rabbits that had veryhigh cholesterol levels. Tese rabbits spontaneouslydeveloped heart disease. o his surprise, Watanabeurther ound that the rabbits, like humans with amilialhypercholesterolemia, lacked LDL receptors. Tus,scientists could study these Watanabe rabbits to gain abetter understanding o amilial hypercholesterolemia in

humans.Prior to the breakthrough at Kobe University, it

was known that LDL’s are secreted rom the liver in theorm o a precursor, called very low-density lipoproteins(VLDL’s), which carry triglycerides as well as relativelysmall amounts o cholesterol. Te triglycerides areremoved rom the VLDL’s by atty and other tissues.What remains is a remnant particle that must be removedrom the blood. What scientists learned by studyingthe Watanabe rabbits is that the removal o the VLDLremnant requires the LDL receptor. Normally, themajority o the VLDL remnants go to the liver where they

bind to LDL receptors and are degraded. In the Watanaberabbit, due to a lack o LDL receptors on liver cells, theVLDL remnants remain in the blood and are eventuallyconverted to LDL’s. Te LDL receptors thus have a dualeffect in controlling LDL levels. Tey are necessary toprevent oversynthesis o LDL’s rom VLDL remnants andthey are necessary or the normal removal o LDL’s romthe blood. With this knowledge, scientists are now well onthe way toward developing drugs that dramatically lowercholesterol levels in people afflicted with certain orms oamilial hypercholesterolemia.

17. In the passage, the author is primarily concernedwith

(A) presenting a hypothesis and describingcompelling evidence in support o it

(B) raising a question and describing an importantdiscovery that led to an answer

(C) showing that a certain genetically causeddisease can be treated effectively with drugs

(D) explaining what causes the genetic mutationthat leads to heart disease

(E) discussing the importance o research onanimals or the study o human disease

18. Which o the ollowing drugs, i developed, wouldmost likely be an example o the kind o drugmentioned in line 52?

(A) A drug that stimulates the production o VLDLremnants

(B) A drug that stimulates the production o LDLrece

hat stimulates the production o anenzyme needed or cholesterol production

(D) A drug that suppresses the production o bodycells that use cholesterol

(E) A drug that prevents triglycerides romattaching to VLDL’s

19. Te passage supplies inormation to answer which othe ollowing questions?

(A) Which body cells are the primary users o

cholesterol?(B) How did scientists discover that LDL’s are

secreted rom the liver in the orm o aprecursor?

(C) Where in the body are VLDL remnantsdegraded?

(D) Which body tissues produce triglycerides?(E) What techniques are used to determine the

presence or absence o cell-surace receptors?

11.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. According to the passage, by studying the Watanaberabbits scientists learned that

(A) VLDL remnants are removed rom the blood byLDL receptors in the liver

(B) LDL’s are secreted rom the liver in the orm oprecursors called VLDL’s

(C) VLDL remnant particles contain small amountso cholesterol

(D) triglycerides are removed rom VLDL’s by attytissues

(E) LDL receptors remove LDL’s rom the blood

21. Te development o drug treatments or some ormso amilial hypercholesterolemia is regarded by theauthor as

(A) possible, but not very important(B) interesting, but too costly to be practical(C) promising, but many years off

(D) extremely unlikely (E) highly probable

22. Te passage implies that i the Watanabe rabbits hadhad as many LDL receptors on their livers as donormal rabbits, the Watanabe rabbits would havebeen

(A) less likely than normal rabbits to develop heartdisease

(B) less likely than normal rabbits to develop highconcentrations o cholesterol in their blood

(C) less useul than they actually were to scientistsin the study o amilial hypercholesterolemiain humans

(D) unable to secrete VLDL’s rom their livers(E) immune to drugs that lower cholesterol levels

in people with certain orms o amilialhypercholesterolemia

23. Te passage implies that Watanabe rabbits differ romnormal rabbits in which o the ollowing ways?

(A) Watanabe rabbits have more LDL receptorsthan do normal rabbits.

(B) Te blood o Watanabe rabbits contains moreVLDL remnants than does the blood onormal rabbits.

(C)Watanabe rabbits have ewer atty tissues thando norma

rmal rabbits.

(E) Te blood o Watanabe rabbits contains ewerLDL’s than does the blood o normal rabbits.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

(Te article rom which the passage was taken appearedin 1981)

When speaking o Romare Bearden, one is temptedto say, “A great Black American artist.” Te subject mattero Bearden’s collages is certainly Black. Portrayals o the

olk o Mecklenburg County, North Carolina, whom heremembers rom early childhood, o the jazz musiciansand tenement roos o his Harlem days, o Pittsburghsteelworkers, and his reconstruction o classical Greekmyths in the guise o the ancient Black kingdom oBenin, attest to this. In natural harmony with this choiceo subject matter are the social sensibilities o the artist,who remains active today with the Cinque Gallery inManhattan, which he helped ound and which is devotedto showing the work o minority artists.

Ten why not call Bearden a Black American artist?Because ultimately this categorization is too narrow“What stan

do is ampliy. I I were just creating apicture o a arm woman rom back home, it would havemeaning to her and people there. But art amplifies itselto something universal.”

24. According to the passage, all o the ollowing aredepicted in Bearden’s collages EXCEP

(A) workers in Pittsburgh’s steel mills(B) scenes set in the ancient kingdom o Benin(C) people Bearden knew as a child(D) traditional representations o the classical

heroes o Greek mythology (E) the jazz musicians o the Harlem Bearden used

to know

25. Te author suggests that Bearden should not becalled a Black American artist because

(A) there are many collages by Bearden in whichthe subject matter is not Black

(B) Bearden’s work reflects the Black Americanexperience in a highly individual style

(C) through the structure o Bearden’s art his Blacksubjects come to represent all o humankind

(D) Bearden’s true significance lies not so much inhis own work as in his efforts to help otherminority artists

(E) much o Bearden’s work uses the ancient Blackkingdom o Benin or its setting

26. Bearden’s social sensibilities and the subject matter ohis collages are mentioned by the author in order toexplain

(A) why one might be tempted to call Bearden a

Black American artist(B) why Bearden cannot be readily categorized(C) why Bearden’s appeal is thought by many to be

ultimately universal(D) how deeply an artist’s artistic creations are

influenced by the artist’s social conscience(E) what makes Bearden unique among

contemporary Black American artists

27. Te author o the passage is chiefly concerned with

(A) discussing Bearden’s philosophy o art(B) assessing the significance o the ethnic element

in Bearden’s workC) acknowledging Bearden’s success in giving

artistic expression to the Black Americanexperience

(D) pointing out Bearden’s helpulness to otherminority artists

(E) tracing Bearden’s progress toward artisticmaturity

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

11.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 11.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) B

19) C

20) A

21) E

22) C

23) B

SECOND PASSAGE

24) D

25) C

26) A

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Te more that is discovered about the intricateorganization o the nervous system, the more it seemsremarkable that genes can successully speciy thedevelopment o that system. Human genes contain toolittle inormation even to speciy which hemisphere othe brain each o a human’s 1011 neurons should occupy,

let alone the hundreds o connections that each neuronmakes. For such reasons, we can assume that there mustbe an important random actor in neural developmentand in particular, that errors must and do occur in thedevelopment o all normal brains

sms. Even

when reared under the same conditions, isogenicorganisms are rarely exact copies o one another, andtheir differences have revealed much about the random variations that result rom an organism’s limited supplyo genetic inormation. In isogenic Daphniae, orexample, even though the position, size, and branching

pattern o each optic neuron are remarkably constant,there is some variability in connectivity, and the numbero synapses varies greatly. Tis variability is probablythe result o random scatter beyond the resolution ogenetic control and is best termed “imprecision,” sinceits converse, the degree o clustering about a mean, isconventionally called “precision.”

Imprecision should be distinguished romdevelopmental mistakes: wrongly migrated neurons,incorrect connections, and the like. o use a computeranalogy, minor rounding-off errors occur universallyand are analogous to imprecision, but occasionally a

binary digit is incorrectly transmitted, perhaps ruining acalculation, and this incorrect transmission is analogousto a developmental mistake. Tus, imprecision is a ormo inaccuracy inherent within the limits o design, butmistakes are orms o gross allibility.

Both imprecision and gross allibility canplausibly be blamed on the insufficiency o geneticinormation, since either could be reduced by addingmore inormation. It is universally accepted amonginormation theorists that codes and languages can bemade mistake-resistant by incorporating redundancy.However, since the amount o space available in any

inormation system is limited, increased redundancyresults in decreased precision. For example, π whenwritten incorrectly in English, “three point one our two,”

can be understood correctly even though a typographierror has occurred. More precision could be gained,however; i those 24 spaces were filled with Arabicnumerals; then π could be expressed to 23 significantdigits, although any error would significantly changethe meaning. Tere exists a trade-off; the more precise

a system is specified, using a given limited amount oinormation, the greater the danger o gross mistakes.Te overall scheme by which genetic inormation isrationed out in organisms, thereore, must involve acompromise between two conflicting priorities: precisiand the avoidance o gross mistakes.

17. Which o the ollowing best expresses the main ideao the passage?

(A) Although studies o isogenic organismshave shown that all organisms are subjectto developmental variations, there is still

scientific debate over the exact causes o these variations.(B) Because o limitations on the amount o

inormation contained in the genes oorganisms, developing nervous systemsare subject to two basic kinds o error, thelikelihood o one o which is reduced onlywhen the likelihood o the other is increased.

(C) Te complexity o an organism’s geneticinormation means that much o the unusual variation that occurs among organismscan best be explained as the result odevelopmental mistakes.

(D) New findings about the nature o the geneticcontrol o neural development support thework o some scientists who argue that thecomputer is an extremely useul model orunderstanding the nervous system.

(E) Te major discovery made by scientistsstudying the genetic control o neuraldevelopment is that both imprecision andgross developmental error can be traced tospecific types o mutations in specific genes.

12.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


18. According to the passage, one o the reasons it hasbeen assumed that there is an important randomelement in human neural development is that

(A) genes cannot speciy certain types odevelopmental processes as well as they canothers

(B) the intricacy o the nervous system allowssmall developmental errors to occur withoutharmul effects

(C) the amount o inormation contained in thegenes is less than the amount necessary tospeciy the location o the neurons

(D) the number o neurons in the human brain varies greatly rom individual to individual

(E) it is theoretically impossible or an organismto protect itsel completely rom grossdevelopmental mistakes

19. Te author suggests which o the ollowing about thefindings o inormation theorists?

(A) Teir findings provocatively challenge thestandard explanation o redundancy in genes.

(B) Teir findings provide useul insights intounderstanding the rationing o geneticinormation.

(C) Teir

mistakes can occur.(D) Teir findings suggest that genes may be able to

speciy neural development more accurately

than had previously been thought.(E) Teir findings support the work o those whouse computer operations as models orunderstanding genetic control.

20. According to the passage, o the ollowing aspectso the optic neurons o isogenic Daphniae, which varies the most?

(A) Size(B) Connectivity(C) Position(D) Branching pattern

(E) Number o synapses

21. Which o the ollowing best describes theorganization o the first paragraph?

(A) A specific case is presented, its details areanalyzed, and a conclusion is drawn rom it

(B) A discovery is announced, its most significantapplication is discussed, and possibilities or

the uture are suggested.(C)A generalization is made, specific situations in

which it is applicable are noted, and problemswith it are suggested.

(D) An observation is made, specifics are providedto support it, and a generalization is derived.

(E) A hypothesis is presented, its implications areclarified, and applications o it are discussed.

22. Te author uses all o the ollowing to clariy thedistinction between imprecision and gross mistakein neural development EXCEP

(A) classification o borderline phenomena(B) a description o the relationship between the

phenomena denoted by each term(C) specific examples o the phenomena denoted by

each term(D) an explanation o at least one o the key terms

involved(E) analogies to other types o phenomena

23. Which o the ollowing can be inerred rom thepassage about the genetic inormation o Daphniae

I. Tere is probably some degree o redundancy

in the inormation controlling neuraldevelopment.

II. Most o the inormation or neural developmentstored in the genes is used to speciy thepositions o the optic neurons.

III. Tere is sufficient inormation to preclude theoccurrence o gross mistakes during neuraldevelopment.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) III only

(D) I and II only (E) II and III only

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

In a recent study, David Cressy examines two centralquestions concerning English immigration to NewEngland in the 1630’s: what kinds o people immigratedand why? Using contemporary literary evidence,shipping lists, and customs records, Cressy finds thatmost adult immigrants were skilled in arming or crafs,

were literate, and were organized in amilies. Each othese characteristics sharply distinguishes the 21,000people who lef or New England in the 1630’s rom mosto the approximately 377,000 English people who hadimmigrated to America

requently noted act thatsome o the immigrants o the 1630’s, most notably theorganizers and clergy, advanced religious explanationsor departure, but he finds that such explanationsusually assumed primacy only in retrospect. Whenhe moves beyond the principal actors, he finds thatreligious explanations were less requently offered and

he concludes that most people immigrated because theywere recruited by promises o material improvement.


(A) summarizing the findings o an investigation(B) analyzing a method o argument(C) evaluating a point o view (D) hypothesizing about a set o circumstances(E) establishing categories

25. According to the passage, Cressy would agreewith which o the ollowing statements about theorganizers among the English immigrants to NewEngland in the 1630’s?.

I. Most o them were clergy.II. Some o them offered a religious explanation or

their immigration.III. Tey did not offer any reasons or their

immigration until some time afer they hadimmigrated.

IV. Tey were more likely than the averageimmigrant to be motivated by materialconsiderations.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) II and III only (D) I, III, and IV only (E) II, III and IV only

26. According to the passage, Cressy has made which othe ollowing claims about what motivated Englishimmigrants to go to New England in the 1630’s?

(A) Tey were motivated by religiousconsiderations alone.

(B) Tey were motivated by economic

considerations alone.(C)Tey were motivated by religious and economic

considerations equally.(D) Tey were motivated more ofen by economic

than by religious considerations.(E) Tey were motivated more ofen by religious

than by economic considerations.

27. Te passage suggests that the majority o thoseEnglish people who had immigrated to America bythe late seventeenth century were

(A) clergy

(B) young children(C) organized in amilies(D) skilled in crafs(E) illiterate

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

12.1 - 2n

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 12.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) C

19) B

20) E

21) D

22) A

23) A

SECOND PASSAGE

24) A

25) B

26) D

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

[Tis passage was excerpted rom an article published in1975.]

Is the Literary critic like the poet, respondingcreatively, intuitively, subjectively to the written word asthe poet responds to human experience? Or is the critic

more like a scientist, ollowing a series o demonstrable, verifiable steps, using an objective method o analysis?For the woman who is a practitioner o eminist

literary criticism, the subjectivity versus objectivity,or critic-as-artist or scientist, debate has specialsignificance; or her, the question is not only academic,but political as well, and her definition will court specialrisks whichever side o the issue it avors. I she defineseminist criticism as objective and scientific—a valid, verifiable, intellectual method that anyone, whetherman or woman, can perorm —the definition not onlyprecludes the critic-as-artist approach, but may alsoimpede accomplishment o the utilitarian political

objectives o those who seek to change the academicestablishment and its thinking, especially about sex roles.I she defines emini

her work becomes vulnerable tothe prejudices o stereotypic ideas about the ways inwhich women think, and will be dismissed by much othe academic establishment. Because o these prejudices,women who use an intuitive approach in their criticismmay find themselves charged with inability to beanalytical, to be objective, or to think critically. Whereasmen may be ree to claim the role o critic-as-artist,women run different proessional risks when they choose

intuition and private experience as critical method anddeense.

Tese questions are political in the sense that thedebate over them will inevitably be less an exploration oabstract matters in a spirit o disinterested inquiry thanan academic power struggle in which the careers andproessional ortunes o many women scholars—onlynow entering the academic proession in substantialnumbers—will be at stake, and with them the chances ora distinctive contribution to humanistic understanding,a contribution that might be an important influenceagainst sexism in our society.

As long as the academic establishment continues toregard objective analysis as “masculine” and an intuitiveapproach

onstruct a theory o eminist criticism, shewould be well advised to place it within the rameworko a general theory o the critical process that is neitherpurely objective nor purely intuitive. Her theory is thenmore likely to be compared and contrasted with othertheories o criticism with some degree o dispassionatedistance.

17. Which o the ollowing titles best summarizes thecontent o the passage?

(A) How Teories o Literary Criticism Can Best BeUsed

(B) Problems Conronting Women Who AreFeminist Literary Critics

(C)A Historical Overview o Feminist LiteraryCriticism

(D) A New Teory o Literary Criticism(E) Literary Criticism: Art or Science?

For the ollowing question, consider each o thechoices separately and select all that apply.

18. It can

can make a unique contribution to society.II. Tey must develop a new theory o the critical

process.

III. Teir criticisms o literature should be entirelyobjective.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and III only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

19. Te author specifically mentions all o the ollowingas difficulties that particularly affect women whoare theoreticians o eminist literary criticismEXCEP the

(A) tendency o a predominantly male academicestablishment to orm preconceptions aboutwomen

(B) limitations that are imposed when criticism isdefined as objective and scientific

(C) likelihood that the work o a womantheoretician who cla

prejudice by someacademics

(D) inescapability o power struggles betweenwomen in the academic proession and theacademic establishment

(E) tendency o members o the academicestablishment to treat all orms o eministliterary theory with hostility

12.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. According to the author, the debate mentioned in thepassage has special significance or the woman whois a theoretician o eminist literary criticism orwhich o the ollowing reasons?

(A) Tere are large numbers o capable womenworking within the academic establishment.

(B) Tere are a ew powerul eminist critics whohave been recognized by the academicestablishment.

(C) like other critics, most women who are literarycritics define criticism as either scientific orartistic.

(D) Women who are literary critics aceproessional r

rary critics are more likelyto participate in the debate than are men whoare literary critics.

21. Which o the ollowing is presented by the author insupport o the suggestion that there is stereotypicthinking among members o the academicestablishment?

(A) A distinctively eminist contribution tohumanistic understanding could work againstthe influence o sexism among members othe academic establishment.

(B) Women who define criticism as artistic may beseen by the academic establishment as beingincapable o critical thinking.

(C) Te debate over the role o the literary critic isofen seen as a political one.(D) Women scholars are only now entering

academia in substantial numbers.(E) Te woman who is a critic is orced to construct

a theory o literary criticism.

22. Which o the ollowing is most likely to be one o the“utilitarian political objectives” mentioned by theauthor (in line 16) ?

(A) o orge a new theory o literary criticism(B) o pursue truth in a disinterested manner

(C) o demonstrate that women are interested inliterary criticism that can be viewed eithersubjectively or objectively

(D) o convince the academic establishment torevise the ways in which it assesses womenscholars’ proessional qualities

(E) o dissuade women who are literary criticsrom taking a subjective approach to literarycriticism

23. It can be inerred that the author would define as“political” (line 31) questions that .

(A) are contested largely through contentions overpower

(B) are primarily academic in nature and open toabstract analysis

(C) are not in themselves important(D) cannot be resolved without extensive debate(E) will be debated by both men and women

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

[Tis passage was excerpted rom an article published in1979.]

Quantum mechanics is a highly successul theory:it supplies methods or accurately calculating theresults o diverse experiments, especially with minute

particles. Te predictions o quantum mechanics,however, give only the probability o an event, not adeterministic statement o whether or not the event willoccur. Because o this probabilism, Einstein remainedstrongly dissatisfied with the theory throughout his lie,though he did not maintain that quantum mechanics iswrong. Rather, he held that it is incomplete: in quantummechanics the motion o a particle must be describedin terms o probabilities, he argued, only because someparameters that

erministic trajectory could be defined.Significantly, this hidden-parameter quantum theory

leads to experimental predictions different rom thoseo traditional quantum mechanics. Einstein’s ideas havebeen tested by experiments perormed since his death,and as most o these experiments support traditionalquantum mechanics, Einstein’s approach is almostcertainly erroneous.

24. Te author regards the idea that traditional quantummechanics is incomplete with

(A) approval(B) surprise(C) indifference(D) apprehension(E) skepticism

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the author’sconclusion that Einstein’s approach is “erroneous”(line 22) might have to be modified because

(A) it is theoretically possible to generate plausibletheories with hidden parameters within them

(B) some experimental tests o Einstein’s theory donot disconfirm the hidden-parameter theoryo quantum mechanics

(C) it is possible or a theory to have hiddenparameters and yet be probabilistic

(D) traditional quantum mechanics has not yetbeen used to analyze all o the phenomena towhich it could be applied

(E) there are too many possible hidden parametersto develop meaningul tests o hidden-parameter theories

26. According to the passage, Einstein posed objectionsto the

(A) existence o hidden parameters in quantumtheory

(B) probabilistic nature o quantum mechanics(C) idea that quantum mechanics is incomplete

(D) results o experiments testing quantum theory (E) importance accorded quantum mechanics in

physics

27. Te passage suggests that which o the ollowingwould have resulted i the experiments mentionedin line 18-19 had not supported the predictions otraditional quantum mechanics?

(A) Einstein, had he been alive, would have revisedhis approach to quantum mechanics.

(B) Hidden-parameter theories would have beenconsidered inaccurate descriptions o real-

world phenomena.(C) A deterministic description o the motion o a

particle might still be considered possible.(D) Quantum mechanics would have ceased to

attract the attention o physicists.(E) Einstein, had he been alive, would have

abandoned attempts to speciy the hiddenparameters that describe motion.

12.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 12.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) A

19) E

20) D

21) B

22) D

23) A

SECOND PASSAGE

24) E

25) B

26) B

27) C

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Classical physics defines the vacuum as a state oabsence: a vacuum is said to exist in a region o space ithere is nothing in it. In the quantum field theories thatdescribe the physics o elementary particles, the vacuumbecomes somewhat more complicated. Even in emptyspace, particles can appear spontaneously as a result o

fluctuations o the vacuum. For example, an electronand a positron, or anti electron, can be created out o the void. Particles created in this way have only a fleetingexistence; they are annihilated almost as soon as theyappear, and their pr

define the vacuum as a spacethat has no real particles in it.

One might expect that the vacuum would always bethe state o lowest possible energy or a given region ospace. I an area is initially empty and a real particle is

put into it, the total energy, it seems, should be raised byat least the energy equivalent o the mass o the addedparticle. A surprising result o some recent theoreticalinvestigations is that this assumption is not invariablytrue. Tere are conditions under which the introductiono a real particle o finite mass into an empty regiono space can reduce the total energy. I the reductionin energy is great enough, an electron and a positronwill be spontaneously created. Under these conditionsthe electron and positron are not a result o vacuumfluctuations but are real particles, which exist indefinitelyand can be detected. In other words, under these

conditions the vacuum is an unstable state and can deca

icles are created.Te essential condition or the decay o the vacuum

is the presence o an intense electric field. As a result othe

ld can be said to acquire an electric charge, andit can be called a charged Vacuum. Te particles thatmaterialize in the space make the charge maniest. Anelectric field o sufficient intensity to create a charged vacuum is likely to be ound in only one place: in theimmediate vicinity o a super heavy atomic nucleus, one

with about twice as many protons as the heaviest naturalnuclei known. A nucleus that large cannot be stable, butit might be possible to assemble one next to a vacuumor long enough to observe the decay o the vacuum.Experiments attempting to achieve this are now underway.

17. Which o the ollowing titles best describes thepassage as a whole?

(A) Te Vacuum: Its Fluctuations and Decay (B) Te Vacuum: Its Creation and Instability (C) Te Vacuum: A State o Absence(D) Particles Tat Materialize in the Vacuum

(E) Classical Physics and the Vacuum

18. According to the passage, the assumption that theintroduction o a real particle into a vacuum raisesthe total energy o that region o space has been casinto doubt by which o the ollow

field experiments(C) Accidental observations made during other

experiments(D) Discovery o several erroneous propositions in

accepted theories

(E) Predictions based on theoretical work

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that scientists arecurrently making efforts to observe which o theollowing events?

(A) Te decay o a vacuum in the presence o virtual particles.

(B) Te decay o a vacuum next to a super heavyatomic nucleus

(C) Te creation o a super heavy atomic nucleusnext to an intense electric field

(D) Te creation o a virtual electron and a virtual

positron as a result o fluctuations o a vacuum

(E) Te creation o a charged vacuum in which onlyreal electrons can be created in the vacuum’sregion o space

13.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. Physicists’ recent investigations o the decay o the vacuum, as described in the passage, most closelyresemble which o the ollowing hypothetical eventsin other disciplines?

(A) On the basis o data gathered in a careullycontrolled laboratory experiment, a chemist

predicts and then demonstrates the physicalproperties o a newly synthesized polymer.

(B) On the basis o manipulations omacroeconomic theory, an economistpredicts that, contrary to accepted economictheory, inflation and unemployment will bothdecline under conditions o rapid economicgrowth.

(C) On the basis o a rereading o the texts o JaneAusten’s novels, a literary critic suggests that,contrary to accepted literary interpretations,Austen’s plots were actually metaphors or

political events in early nineteenth-centuryEngland.(D) On the basis o data gathered in careully

planned observations o several species obirds, a biologist proposes a modificationin the accepted theory o interspeciescompetition.

(E) On the basis o a study o observationsincidentally recorded in ethnographers’descriptions o non-Western societies, ananthropologist proposes a new theory okinship relations.

21. According to the passage, the author considers thereduction o energy in an empty region o space towhich a real particle has been added to be

(A) a well-known process(B) a requent occurrence(C) a fleeting aberration(D) an unimportant event(E) an unexpected outcome

22. According to the passage, virtual particles differentrom real particles in which o the ollowing ways?

I. Virtual particles have extremely short lietimes.II. Virtual particles are created in an intense electric

field.III. Virtual particles cannot be detected directly.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) III only (D) I and II only (E) I and III only

23. Te author’s assertions concerning the conditionsthat lead to the decay o the vacuum would be mostweakened i which o the ollowing occurred?

(A) Scientists created an electric field next to a vacuum, but ound that the electric fieldwas

ts assembled a super heavy atomicnucleus next to a vacuum, but ound that no virtual particles were created in the vacuum’sregion o space.

(C) Scientists assembled a super heavy atomicnucleus next to a vacuum, but ound thatthey could not then detect any real particlesin the vacuum’s region o space.

(D) Scientists introduced a virtual electron and a virtual positron into a vacuum’s region ospace, but ound that the vacuum did not

then fluctuate.(E) Scientists introduced a real electron and a realpositron into a vacuum’s region o space,but ound that the total energy o the spaceincreased by the energy equivalent o themass o the particles.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Simone de Beauvoir’s work greatly influencedBetty Friedan’s—indeed, made it possible. Why,then, was it Friedan who became the prophet owomen’s emancipation in the United States? Politicalconditions, as well as a certain anti-intellectual bias,prepared America

e existence o women’soppression was too radical or the United States inthe fifies, and Beauvoir’s conclusion, that change in

women’s economic condition, though insufficient byitsel, “remains the basic actor” in improving women’ssituation, was particularly unacceptable.

24. According to the passage, one difference betweenTe Feminine Mystique and Te Second Sex is thatFriedan’s book

(A) rejects the idea that women are oppressed(B) provides a primarily theoretical analysis o

women’s lives(C) does not reflect the political belies o its author(D) suggests that women’s economic condition has

no impact on their status(E) concentrates on the practical aspects o the

question o women’s emancipation

25. Te author quotes rom Te Nation most probably inorder to

(A) modiy an earlier assertion(B) point out a possible exception to her argument(C) illustrate her central point(D) clariy the meaning o a term(E) cite an expert opinion

26. It can be inerred rom the passage that which o theollowing is not a actor in the explanation o whyTe Feminine Mystique was received more positivelyin the United States than was Te Second Sex ?

(A) By 1963 political conditions in the United Statehad changed.

(B) Friedan’s book was less intellectual and abstractthan Beauvoir’s.

(C) Readers did not recognize the powerulinfluence o Beauvoir’s book on Friedan’sideas.

(D) Friedan’s approach to the issue o women’semancipation was less radical thanBeauvoir’s.

(E) American readers were more willing to considethe problem o the oppression o women inthe sixties than they had been in the fifies.

27. According to the passage, Beauvoir’s book assertedthat the status o women

(A) is the outcome o political oppression(B) is inherently tied to their economic condition(C) can be best improved under a communist

government(D) is a theoretical, rather than a pragmatic, issue(E) is a critical area o discussion in Marxist

economic theory

13.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 13.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) E

19) B

20) B

21) E

22) E

23) C

SECOND PASSAGE

24) E

25) C

26) C

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

One o the questions o interest in the study o theevolution o spiders is whether the weaving o orb websevolved only once or several times. About hal the 35,000known kinds o spiders make webs; a third o the webweavers make orb webs. Since most orb weavers belongeither to the Araneidae or the Uloboridae amilies,

the origin o the orb web can be determined only byascertaining whether th

e amilies evolved rom differentancestors, thereby contradicting Wiehle’s theory. Tistheory postulates that the amilies must be related, basedon, the assumption that complex behavior, such as webbuilding, could evolve only once. According to Kullman,web structure is the only characteristic that suggestsa relationship between amilies. Te amilies differ inappearance, structure o body hair, and arrangemento eyes. Only Uloborids lack venom glands. Furtheridentification and study o characteristic eatures will

undoubtedly answer the question o the evolution o theorb web.


(A) settle the question o whether, orb webs evolvedonce or more than once

(B) describe scientific speculation concerning anissue related to the evolution o orb webs

(C) analyze the differences between thecharacteristic eatures o spiders in theAraneidae and Uloboridae amilies

(D) question the methods used by earlierinvestigators o the habits o spiders

(E) demonstrate that Araneidae spiders are notrelated to Uloboridae spiders

18. It can be inerred rom the passage that all orb-weaving spiders belong to types o spiders that

(A) lack venom glands(B) are included either in the Uloboridae or

Araneidae amilies(C) share ew characteristic eatures with other

spider types(D) comprise less than a third o all known types o

spiders(E) are more recently evolved than other types o

spiders

19. According to the passage, members o the Araneidaeamily can be distinguished rom members o theUloboridae amily by all o the ollowing EXCEP

(A) the presence o venom glands’(B) the type o web they spin(C) the structure o their body hair

(D) the arrangement o their eyes ,(E) their appearance

20. Which o the ollowing statements, i true, mostweakens Wiehle’s theory that complex behaviorcould evolve only once?

(A) Horses, introduced to the New World by theSpaniards, thrived under diverse climaticconditions.

(B) Plants o the Palmaceae amily, descendantso a common ancestor, evolved unique seedorms even though the plants occupy similar

habitats throughout the world.(C) All mammals are descended rom a small,

Rodent like animal whose physicalcharacteristics in some orm are ound in allits descendants.

(D) Plants in the Cactaceae and Euphorbiaceaeamilies, although they ofen look alikeand have developed similar mechanismsto meet the rigors o the desert, evolvedindependently.

(E) Te Cuban anole, which was recentlyintroduced in the Florida wilds, is quickly

replacing the native Florida chameleonbecause the anole has no competitors.

13.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

“Popular art” has a number o meanings, impossibleto define with any precision, which range rom olkloreto junk. Te poles are clear enough, but the middletends to blur. Te Hollywood Western o the 1930’s, orexample, has elements o olklore, but is closer to junkthan to high art or olk art. Tere can be great trash,

just as there is bad high art. Te musicals o GeorgeGershwin are great popular art, never aspiring to highart. Schubert and Brahms, however, used elements opopular music—olk themes—in works clearly intendedas hi

thout recognizing the essential trashinesso the genre.

As an example o such a transmutation, consider

what Verdi made o the typical political elements onineteenth century opera. Generally in the plots o theseoperas, a hero or heroine—usually portrayed only asan individual, unettered by class—is caught betweenthe immoral corruption o the aristocracy and thedoctrinaire rigidity or secret greed o the leaders o theproletariat. Verdi transorms this naive and unlikelyormulation with music o extraordinary energy andrhythmic vitality, music more subtle than it seems atfirst hearing. Tere are scenes and arias that still soundlike calls to arms and were clearly understood as suchwhen they were first perormed. Such pieces lend an

immediacy to the otherwise veiled political message othese operas and call up eelings beyond those o theopera itsel.

Or consider Verdi’s treatment o character. BeoreVerdi, there were rarely any characters at all in musicaldrama, only a series o situations which allowed thesingers to express a series o emotional states. Anyattempt to find coherent psychological portrayal in theseoperas is misplaced ingenuity. Te only coherence wasthe singer’s vocal technique: when the cast changed, newarias were almost

stency and integrity, even i, in manycases, the consistency is that o pasteboard melodrama.Te integrity o the character is achieved through themusic: once he had become established, Verdi did notrewrite his music or different singers or countenancealterations or substitutions o somebody else’s arias inone o his operas, as every eighteenth century composerhad done. When he revised an opera, it was only ordramatic economy and effectiveness.

21. Te author reers to Schubert and Brahms in order tosuggest

(A) that their achievements are no less substantialthan those o Verdi

(B) that their works are examples o great trash(C) the extent to which Schubert and Brahms

influenced the later compositions o Verdi(D) a contrast between the conventions o

Nineteenth century opera and those o othermusical orms

(E) that popular music could be employed incompositions intended as high art

22. According to the passage, the immediacy o thepolitical message in Verdi’s operas stems rom the

(A) vitality and subtlety o the music(B) audience’s amiliarity with earlier operas(C) portrayal o heightened emotional states

(D) individual talents o the singers(E) verisimilitude o the characters

23. According to the passage, all o the ollowingcharacterize musical drama beore Verdi EXCEP

(A) arias tailored to a particular singer’s ability (B) adaptation o music rom other operas(C) psychological inconsistency in the portrayal o

characters(D) expression o emotional states in a series o

dramatic situations(E) music used or the purpose o defining a

character

13.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. It can be inerred that the author regards Verdi’srevisions to his operas with

(A) regret that the original music and texts werealtered

(B) concern that many o the revisions altered theplots o the original work

(C) approval or the intentions that motivated the’revisions

(D) puzzlement, since the revisions seem largelyinsignificant

(E) enthusiasm, since the revisions were aimed atreducing the conventionality o the operas’plots

25. According to the passage, one o Verdi’s achievementswithin the ramework o nineteenth century operaand its conventions was to

(A) limit the extent to which singers influenced the

musical composition and perormance o hisoperas

(B) use his operas primarily as orums to protestboth the moral corruption and dogmaticrigidity o the political leaders o his time

(C) portray psychologically complex charactersshaped by the political environmentsurrounding them

(D) incorporate elements o olklore into both themusic and plots o his operas .

(E) introduce political elements into an art ormthat had traditionally avoided political

content

26. Which o the ollowing best describes the relationship o the first paragraph o the passage to thepassage as a whole?

(A) It provides a group o specific examples romwhich generalizations are drawn later in thepassage.

(B) It leads to an assertion that is supported byexamples later in the passage.

(C)It defines terms and relationships that arechallenged in an argument later in thepassage.

(D) It briefly compares and contrasts severalachievements that are examined in detail latein the passage.

(E) It explains a method o judging a work o art, amethod that is used later in the passage.

27. It can be inerred that the author regards the

independence rom social class o the heroes andheroines o nineteenth-century opera as

(A) an idealized but undamentally accurateportrayal o bourgeois lie

(B) a plot convention with no real connection topolitical reality

(C) a plot refinement unique to Verdi(D) a symbolic representation o the position o the

bourgeoisie relative to the aristocracy and theproletariat

(E) a convention largely seen as irrelevant byaudiences

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 13.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) D

19) B

20) D

SECOND PASSAGE

21) E

22) A

23) E

24) C

25) A

26) B

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Ragtime is a musical orm that synthesizes olkmelodies and musical techniques into a brie quadrille-like structure, designed to be played—exactly as written—on the piano. A strong analogy exists between Europeancomposers like Ralph Vaughan Williams, Edvard Grieg,and Anton Dvořák who combined olk tunes and their

own original materials in larger compositions andthe pioneer ragtime composers in the United States.Composers like Scott Joplin and James Scott were in asense collectors or musicologists, collecting dance andolk music in Black communities and consciously shapingit into brie suites or anthologies called piano rags.

It has sometimes been charged that ragtime ismechanical. For instance, Wilred Mellers comments,“rags were transerred to the pianola roll and, even i notplayed by a machine, should be played like a machine,with meticulous precision.” However, there is no reasonto assume that ragtime is inherently mechanical simplybecause commercial manuacturers applied a mechanical

recording method to ragtime, the only way to recordpianos at that date. Ragtime’s is not a mechanicalprecision, and it is not precision limited to the style operormance. It arises rom ragtime’s ollowing a well-defined orm and obeying simple rules within that orm.

Te classic ormula or the piano rag disposes threeto five themes in sixteen-bar strains, ofen organized withrepeats. Te rag opens with a bright, memorable strain ortheme, ollowed by a similar theme, leading to a trio omarked lyrical character, with the structure concluded bya lyrical strain that parallels the rhythmic developmentso the earlier themes. Te aim o the structure is to rise

rom one theme to another in a stair-step manner, endingon a note o trium

odic figures. Not concerned withdevelopment o musical themes, the ragtime composerinstead sets a theme down intact, in finished orm, andlinks it to various related themes. ension in ragtimecompositions arises rom a polarity between two basicingredients: a continuous bass— called by jazz musiciansa boom-chick bass—in the pianist’s lef hand, and its

melodic, syncopated counterpart in the right hand.Ragtime remains distinct rom jazz both as an

instrumental style and as a genre. Ragtime style stresses apattern o repeated rhythms, not the constant inventionsand variations o jazz. As a genre, ragtime requires strictattention to structure, not inventiveness or virtuosity.It exists as a tradition, a set o conventions, a body owritten scores, separate rom the individual playersassociated with it. In this sense ragtime is more akin toolk music o the nineteenth century than to jazz.

17. Which o the ollowing best describes the mainpurpose o the passage?

(A) o contrast ragtime music and jazz(B) o acknowledge and counter significant adverse

criticisms o ragtime music(C) o define ragtime music as an art orm and

describe its structural characteristics(D) o review the history o ragtime music and

analyze ragtime’s effect on listeners(E) o explore the similarities between ragtime

music and certain European musicalcompositions

18. According to the passage, each o the ollowing is acharacteristic o ragtime compositions that ollowthe classic ragtime ormula EXCEP

(A) syncopation(B) well-defined melodic figures

(C) rising rhythmic-melodic intensity (D) ull development o musical themes(E) a bass line distinct rom the melodic line

14.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. According to the passage, Ralph Vaughan Williams,Anton Dvořák, and Scott Joplin are similar in thatthey all

(A) conducted research into musicological history (B) wrote original compositions based on olk tunes(C) collected and recorded abbreviated piano suites

(D) created intricate sonata-like musical structures(E) explored the relations between Black music and

continental olk music

20. Te author rejects the argument that ragtime is amechanical music because that argument

(A) overlooks the precision required o the ragtimeplayer

(B) does not accurately describe the sound oragtime pianola music

(C) conuses the means o recording and theessential character o the music

(D) exaggerates the influence o the perormancestyle o proessional ragtime players on thereputation o the genre

(E) improperly identifies commercial ragtime musicwith the subtler classic ragtime style

21. It can be inerred that the author o the passagebelieves that the most important eature o ragtimemusic is its

(A) commercial success(B) ormal structure(C) emotional range

(D) improvisational opportunities(E) role as a orerunner o jazz

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that theessential nature o ragtime has been obscured bycommentaries based on

(A) the way ragtime music was first recorded(B) interpretations o ragtime by jazz musicians(C) the dance ashions that were contemporary

with ragtime(D) early reviewers’ accounts o characteristic

Structure

(E) the musical sources used by Scott Joplin andJames Scott

23. Which o the ollowing is most nearly analogousin source and artistic character to a ragtimecomposition as described in the passage?

(A) Symphonic music derived rom complex jazzmotis

(B) An experimental novel based on well-known

cartoon characters(C) A dramatic production in which actors invent

scenes and improvise lines(D) A ballet whose disciplined choreography is

based on olk-dance steps(E) A painting whose abstract shapes evoke amiliar

objects in a natural landscape

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Echolocating bats emit sounds in patterns—characteristic o each species—that contain bothrequency-modulated (FM) and constant-requency(CF) signals. Te broadband FM signals and thenarrowband CF signals travel out to a target, reflectrom it, and return to the hunting bat. In this process

o transmission and reflection, the sounds are changed,and the changes in the echoes enable the bat to perceiveeatures o the target.

Te FM signals report inormation about targetcharacteristics that modiy the timing and the finerequency struc

F signals portray only the target’spresence and, in the case o some bat species, its motionrelative to the bat’s. Responding to changes in the CFecho’s requency, bats o some species correct in flight orthe direction and velocity o their moving prey.

24. According to the passage, the inormation providedto the bat by CF echoes differs rom that providedby FM echoes in which o the ollowing ways?

(A) Only CF echoes alert the bat to moving targets.(B) Only CF echoes identiy the range o widely

spaced targets.(C) Only CF echoes report the target’s presence to

the bat.(D) In some species, CF echoes enable the bat to

judge whether it is closing in on its target.(E) In some species, CF echoes enable the bat to

discriminate the size o its target and thedirection in which the target is moving.

25. According to the passage, the configuration othe target is reported to the echo locating bat bychanges in the

(A) echo spectrum o CF signals(B) echo spectrum o FM signals(C) direction and velocity o the FM echoes(D) delay between transmission and reflection o

the CF signals(E) relative requencies o the FM and the CF

Echoes

26. Te author presents the inormation concerning batsonar in a manner that could be best described as

(A) argumentative(B) commendatory(C) critical(D) disbelieving

(E) objective

27. Which o the ollowing best describes theorganization o the passage?

(A) A act is stated, a process is outlined, andspecific details o the process are described.

(B) A act is stated, and examples suggesting that adistinction needs correction are considered.

(C) A act is stated, a theory is presented to explainthat act, and additional acts are introducedto validate the theory.

(D) A act is stated, and two theories are compared

in light o their explanations o this act.(E) A act is stated, a process is described, and

examples o still another process areillustrated in detail.

14.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 14.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) D

19) B

20) C

21) B

22) A

23) D

SECOND PASSAGE

24) D

25) B

26) E

27) A

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Te social sciences are less likely than otherintellectual enterprises to get credit or theiraccomplishments. Arguably, this is so because thetheories and conceptual constructs, o the social sciencesare especially accessible: human intelligence apprehendstruths about human affairs with particular acility. And

the discoveries o the social sciences, once isolated andlabeled, are quickly absorbed into conventional wisdom,where upon they lose their distinctiveness as scientificadvances.

Tis underappreciation o the social sciencescontrasts oddly with what many see as theiroverutilization. Game theory is pressed into service instudies o shifing international alliances. Evaluationresearch is called u

l security. Yet this rush intopractical applications is itsel quite understandable:

public policy must continually be made, andpolicymakers rightly eel that even tentative findings anduntested theories are better guides to decision makingthan no findings and no theories at all.


(A) advocating a more modest view, and less widespread utilization, o the social sciences

(B) analyzing the mechanisms or translatingdiscoveries into applications in the socialsciences

(C) dissolving the air o paradox inherent in humanbeings studying themselves

(D) explaining a peculiar dilemma that the socialsciences are in

(E) maintaining a strict separation between pureand applied social science

18. Which o the ollowing is a social science disciplinethat the author mentions as being possiblyoverutilized?

(A) Conventional theories o social change(B) Game theory (C) Decision making theory (D) Economic theories o international alliances(E) Systems analysis

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that, whenspeaking o the “overutilization” (line 13) o thesocial sciences, the author is reerring to the

(A) premature practical application o social scienceadvances

(B) habitual reliance on the social sciences even

where common sense would serve equallywell

(C) practice o bringing a greater variety o socialscience disciplines to bear on a problem thanthe nature o the problem warrants

(D) use o social science constructs by people whodo not ully understand them

(E) tendency on the part o social scientists to recaseveryday truths in social science jargon

20. Te author conronts the claim that the socialsciences are being over utilized with

(A) proo that overextensions o social scienceresults are sel-correcting

(B) evidence that some public policy is madewithout any recourse to social sciencefindings or theories

(C) a long list o social science applications that areperectly appropriate and extremely ruitul

(D) the argument that overutilization is by andlarge the exception rather than the rule

(E) the observation that this practice representsthe lesser o two evils under existingcircumstances

14.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Te term “Ice Age” may give a wrong impression. Teepoch that geologists know as the Pleistocene and thatspanned the 1.5 to 2.0 million years prior to the currentgeologic epoch was not one long continuous glaciations, buta period o oscillating climate with ice advances punctuatedby times o interglacial climate not very different rom

the climate experienced now. Ice sheets that derived roman ice cap centered on nor

ations affected most o the resto the world; or example, in the deserts, periods o wetterconditions (pluvials) contrasted with drier, interpluvialperiods. Although the time involved is so short, about 0.04percent o the total age o the Earth, the amount o attentiondevoted to the Pleistocene has been incredibly large,probably because o its immediacy, and because the epochlargely coincides with the appearance on Earth o humansand their immediate ancestors.

Tere is no reliable way o dating much o the Ice Age.

Geological dates are usually obtained by using the rates odecay o various radioactive elements ound in minerals.Some o these rates are suitable or very old rocks butinvolve increasing errors when used or young rocks; othersare suitable or very young rocks and errors increase rapidlyin older rocks. Most o the Ice Age spans a period o timeor which no element has an appropriate decay rate.

Nevertheless, researchers o the Pleistocene epoch havedeveloped all sorts o more or less anciul model schemeso how they would have arranged the Ice Age had they beenin charge o events. For example, an early classification oAlpine glaciations suggested the existence there o our

glaciations named the Gunz, Mindel, Riss, and Würm.Tis succession was based primarily on a series o depositsand events not directly relat

more usual modern methodo studying biological remains ound in interglacial bedsthemselves interstratified within glacial deposits. Yet thissuccession was orced willy-nilly onto the glaciated partso Northern Europe, where there are partial successionso true glacial ground moraines and interglacial deposits,with hopes o ultimately piecing them together to provide acomplete Pleistocene succession. Eradication o the Alpinenomenclature is still proving a Herculean task.

Tere is no conclusive evidence about the relativelength, complexity, and temperatures o the various glacialand interglacial periods. We do not know whether we live ina postglacial period or an interglacial period. Te chill truthseems to be that we are already past the optimum climate opostglacial time. Studies o certain ossil distributions ando the pollen o certain temperate plants suggest decreaseso a degree or two in both summer and winter temperaturesand. thereore, that we may be in the declining climaticphase leading to glaciations and extinction.

21. In the passage, the author is primarily concernedwith

(A) searching or an accurate method o dating thePleistocene epoch

(B) discussing problems involved in providing anaccurate picture o the Pleistocene epoch

(C) declaring opposition to the use o the term “IceAge” or the Pleistocene epoch

(D) criticizing anciul schemes about whathappened in the Pleistocene epoch

(E) reuting ‘the idea that there is no way to tell iwe are now living in an Ice Age

22. Te “wrong impression” (line 1) to which the author

reers is the idea that the

(A) climate o the Pleistocene epoch was not very different rom the climate we are nowexperiencing

(B) climate o the Pleistocene epoch was composedo periods o violent storms

(C) Pleistocene epoch consisted o very wet, coldperiods mixed with very dry, hot periods

(D) Pleistocene epoch comprised one periodo continuous glaciations during whichNorthern Europe was covered with ice sheets

(E) Pleistocene epoch had no long periods duringwhich much o the Earth was covered by ice

14.2 - 2nd

ine(5)

10)

15)

20)

25)

30)

35)

40)

45)

50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


23. According to the passage, one o the reasons or thedeficiencies o the “early classification o Alpineglaciations” (line 31-32) is that it was

(A) derived rom evidence that was onlytangentially related to times o actualglaciations

(B) based primarily on ossil remains rather than onactual living organisms

(C) an abstract, imaginative scheme o how theperiod might have been structured

(D) based on unmethodical examinations orandomly chosen glacial biological remains

(E) derived rom evidence that had beenhaphazardly gathered rom glacial depositsand inaccurately evaluated

24. Which o the ollowing does the passage imply aboutthe “early classification o Alpine glaciations” (lines

31-32) ?(A) It should not have been applied as widely as it

was.(B) It represents the best possible scientific practice,

given the tools available at the time.(C) It was a valuable tool, in its time, or measuring

the length o the our periods o glaciations.(D) It could be useul, but only as a general guide to

the events o the Pleistocene epoch.(E) It does not shed any light on the methods

used at the time or investigating periods oglaciations.

n accurate chronology o

events o the Pleistocene epoch would be a

(A) clearer idea o the origin o the Earth(B) clearer picture o the Earth during the time that

humans developed(C) clearer understanding o the reasons or the

existence o deserts(D) more detailed understanding o how

radioactive dating o minerals works(E) firmer understanding o how the northern polar

ice cap developed

26. Te author reers to deserts primarily in order to

(A) illustrate the idea that an interglacial climate ismarked by oscillations o wet and dry periods

(B) illustrate the idea that what happened in thedeserts during the Ice Age had ar-reachingeffects even on the ice sheets o Central and

Northern Europe(C) illustrate the idea that the effects o the Ice Age’s

climatic variations extended beyond the areaso ice

(D) support the view that during the Ice Age sheetso ice covered some o the deserts o theworld

(E) support the view that we are probably living in apostglacial period

27. Te author would regard the idea that we are living inan interglacial period as

(A) unimportant(B) unscientific(C) sel-evident(D) plausible(E) absurd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 14.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) B

19) A

20) E

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) D

23) A

24) A

25) B

26) C

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Eight percent o the Earth’s crust is aluminum,and there are hundreds o aluminum-bearing mineralsand vast quantities o the rocks that contain them. Tebest aluminum ore is bauxite, defined as aggregateso aluminous minerals, more or less impure, in whichaluminum is present as hydrated oxides. Bauxite is

the richest o all those aluminous rocks that occur inlarge quantities, and it yields alumina, the intermediateproduct required or the production o aluminum.Alumina also occurs naturally as the mineral corundum,but corundum is not ound in large deposits o highpurity, and thereore it

reractory, resistant to analysis,and extremely difficult to process. Te aluminumsilicates are thereore generally unsuitable alternatives tobauxite because considerably more energy is required toextract alumina rom them.

17. Te author implies that a mineral must either be orreadily supply which o the ollowing in order to beclassified as aluminum ore?

(A) An aggregate(B) Bauxite(C) Alumina(D) Corundum(E) An aluminum silicate

18. Te passage supplies inormation or answering allo the ollowing questions regarding aluminousminerals EXCEP:

(A) What percentage o the aluminum in the Earth’scrust is in the orm o bauxite?

(B) Are aluminum-bearing non bauxite minerals

plentiul?(C) Do the aluminous minerals ound in bauxite

contain hydrated oxides?(D) Are aluminous hydrated oxides ound in rocks?(E) Do large quantities o bauxite exist?

19. Te author implies that corundum would be used toproduce aluminum i

(A) corundum could be ound that is notcontaminated by silicates

(B) the production o alumina could be eliminatedas an intermediate step in manuacturing

aluminum(C) many large deposits o very high quality

corundum were to be discovered(D) new technologies were to make it possible to

convert corundum to a silicate(E) manuacturers were to realize that the world’s

supply o bauxite is not unlimited

15.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

raditionally, the study o history has had fixedboundaries and ocal points—periods, countries, dramaticevents, and great leaders. It also has had clear and firmnotions o scholarly procedure: how one inquires into ahistorical problem, how one presents and documents one’sfindings, what constitutes admissible and adequate proo.

Anyone who has ollowed recent historical literaturecan testiy to the revolution that is taking place, inhistorical studies. Te currently ashionable subjectscome directly rom the sociology catalog: childhood,work, leisure. Te new subjects are accompanied by newmethods. Where history once was primarily narrative,it is now entirely analytic. Te old que

estion “Why” ispsychoanalysis, and its use has given rise to psychohistory.

Psychohistory does not merely use psychologicalexplanations in historical contexts. Historians have

always used such explanations when they wereappropriate and when there was sufficient evidence orthem. But this pragmatic use o psychology is not whatpsychohistorians intend. Tey are committed, not just topsychology in general, but to Freudian psychoanalysis.Tis commitment precludes a commitment to historyas historians have always understood it. Psychohistoryderives its “acts” not rom history, the detailed records oevents and their consequences, but rom psychoanalysiso the individuals who made history, and deduces itstheories not rom this or that instance in their lives, butrom a view o human nature that transcends history.

It denies the basic criterion o historical evidence: thatevidence be publicly accessible to, and thereore assessableby, all historians. And it violates the basic tenet ohistorical method: that historians be alert to the negativeinstances that would reute their theses. Psychohistorians,convinced o the absolute rightness o their own theories,are also convinced that theirs is the “deepest” explanationo any event, that other explanations all short o thetruth.

Psychohistory is not content to violate the disciplineo history (in the sense o the proper mode o studyingand writing about the past); it also violates the past itsel.

It denies to the past an integrity and will o its own, inwhich people acted out o a variety o motives and inwhich events had a multiplicity o causes and effects.It imposes upon the past the same determinism that itimposes upon the present, thus robbing people and eventso their individuality and o their complexity. Insteado respecting the particularity o the past, it assimilatesall events, past and present, into a single deterministicschema that is presumed to be true at all times and in allcircumstances.

20. Which o the ollowing best states the main point othe passage?

(A)Te approach o psycho historians to historicalstudy is currently in vogue even though itlacks the rigor and verifiability o traditionalhistorical method.

(B) raditional historians can benefit rom studyingthe techniques and findings o psychohistorians.

(C) Areas o sociological study such as childhoodand work are o little interest to traditionalhistorians.

(D) Te psychological assessment o an individual’sbehavior and attitudes is more inormativethan the details o his or her daily lie.

(E) History is composed o unique and nonrepeating events that must be individuallyanalyzed on the basis o publicly verifiable

evidence.

21. It can be inerred rom the passage that one way inwhich traditional history can be distinguished rompsychohistory is that traditional history usually

(A) views past events as complex and having theirown individuality

(B) relies on a single interpretation o humanbehavior to explain historical events

(C) interprets historical events in such a way thattheir specific nature is transcended

(D) trurns to psychological explanations in

historical contexts to account or events(E) relies strictly on data that are concrete andquantifiable

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that the methodsused by psycho historians probably prevent themrom

(A) presenting their material in chronological order(B) producing a one-sided picture o an individual’s

personality and motivations(C) uncovering alternative explanations that might

cause them to question their own conclusions

(D) offering a consistent interpretation, o theimpact o personality on historical events

(E) recognizing connections between agovernment’s political actions and theaspirations o government leaders

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

15.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


23. Te passage supplies inormation or answeringwhich o the ollowing questions?

(A) What are some specific examples o the use opsychohistory in historical interpretation?

(B) When were the conventions governingthe practice o traditional history first

established?(C) When do traditional historians consider

psychological explanations o historicaldevelopments appropriate?

(D) What sort o historical figure is best suited orPsycho historical analysis?

(E) What is the basic criterion o historical evidencerequired by traditional historians?

24. Te author mentions which o the ollowing as acharacteristic o the practice o psychohistorians?

(A) Te lives o historical figures are presented in

episodic rather than narrative orm.(B) Archives used by psycho historians to gather

material are not accessible to other scholars.(C) Past and current events are all placed within the

same deterministic schema.(D) Events in the adult lie o a historical figure are

seen to be more consequential than are thosein the childhood o the figure.

(E) Analysis is ocused on group behavior ratherthan on particular events in an individual’slie.

25. Te author o the passage suggests thatpsychohistorians view history primarily as

(A) a report o events, causes, and effects that isgenerally accepted by historians but which is,or the most part, unverifiable

(B) an episodic account that lacks cohesion becauserecords o the role o childhood, work, andleisure in the lives o historical figures are rare

(C) an uncharted sea o seemingly unexplainableevents that have meaning only whenexamined as discrete units

(D) a record o the way in which a closed set o

immutable psychological law seems to haveshaped events

(E) a proo o the existence o intricate causal interrelationships between past and present events

26. Te author o the passage puts the word “deepest”(line 38) in quotation marks most probably inorder to

(A) signal her reservations about the accuracy opsychohistorians’ claims or their work

(B) draw attention to a contradiction in the

psychohistorians’ method(C) emphasize the major difference between the

traditional historians’ method and that opsychohistorians

(D) disassociate her opinion o the psychohistorianclaims rom her opinion o their method

(E) question the useulness o psychohistoriansinsights into traditional historical scholarship

27. In presenting her analysis, the author does all o theollowing EXCEP:

(A) Make general statements without reerence to

specific examples.(B) Describe some o the criteria employed by

traditional historians.(C) Question the adequacy o the psychohistorians

interpretation o events.(D) Point out inconsistencies in the

psychohistorian’s application o theirmethods.

(E) Contrast the underlying assumptions opsychohistorians with those o traditionalhistorians.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 15.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) A

19) C

SECOND PASSAGE

20) A

21) A

22) C

23) E

24) C

25) D

26) A

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Jean Wagner’s most enduring contribution to thestudy o Aro-American poetry is his insistence thatit be analyzed in a religious, as well as secular, rameo reerence. Te appropriateness o such an approachmay seem sel-evident or a tradition commencing withspirituals and owing its early orms, rhythms, vocabulary,

and evangelical ervor to Wesleyan hymnals. But beoreWagner a secular outlook that analyzed Black poetrysolely within the context o political and social protestwas dominant in the field.

It is Wagner

s eelings are ofen applied to racialissues and racial problems are ofen projected onto ametaphysical plane. Wagner ound this most eloquentlyillustrated in the Black spiritual, where the desire orreedom in this world and the hope or salvation in thenext are inextricably intertwined.


(A) contrast the theories o Jean Wagner with thoseo other contemporary critics

(B) document the influence o Jean Wagner on thedevelopment o Aro-American poetry

(C) explain the relevance o Jean Wagner’s work tothe study o Aro-American religion

(D) indicate the importance o Jean Wagner’sanalysis o Aro-American poetry

(E) present the contributions o Jean Wagner to thestudy o Black spirituals

18. All o the ollowing aspects o Aro-Americanpoetry are reerred to in the passage as having beeninfluenced by Wesleyan hymnals EXCEP

(A) subject matter(B) word choice(C) rhythm

(D) structure(E) tone

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that, beoreWagner, most students o Aro-American poetrydid which o the ollowing?

(A) Contributed appreciably to the ‘transer opolitical protest rom Aro-American poetryto direct political action.

(B) Ignored at least some o the historical roots oAro-American poetry.

(C) Analyzed ully the aspects o social protest to

be ound in such traditional orms o Aro-American poetry as the Black spiritual.

(D) Regarded as unimportant the development oervent emotionalism in a portion o Aro-American poetry.

(E) Concentrated on the complex relations betweenthe technical elements in Aro-Americanpoetry and its political content.

15.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

wo relatively recent independent developmentsstand behind the current major research effort onnitrogen fixation, the process by which bacteriasymbiotically render leguminous plants independento nitrogen ertilizer. Te one development has beenthe rapid, sustained increase in the price o nitrogen

ertilizer. Te other development has been the rapidgrowth o knowledge o and technical sophistication ingenetic engineering. Fertilizer prices, largely tied to theprice o natural gas, huge amounts o which go into themanuacture o ertilizer, will continue to represent anenormous and escalating economic burden on modernagriculture, spurring the search or alternatives tosynthetic ertilizers. And genetic engineering is just thesort o undamental breakthrough that opens up prospectso wholly novel alternatives. One such novel idea is thato inserting into the chromosomes o plants discretegenes that are not a part o the plants natural constitution:specifically, the idea o inserting into non leguminous

plants the genes, i they can be identified and isolated, thatfit the leguminous plants to be hosts or nitrogen-fixingbacteria. Hence, the intensified research on legumes.

Nitrogen fixation is a process in which certainbacteria use atmospheric nitrogen gas, which green plantscannot directly utilize, to produce ammonia, a nitrogencompound plants can use. It is one o nature’s great ironiesthat the availability o nitrogen in the soil requently setsan upper limit on plant growth even though the plants’leaves are bathed in a sea o nitrogen gas. Te leguminousplants—among them crop plants such as soybeans, peas,alala, and clover—have solved the nitrogen supply

problem by entering into a symbiotic relationship withthe bacterial ge

bitat and receives surplus ammonia inexchange. Hence, legumes can thrive in nitrogen-depletedsoil.

Unortunately, most o the major ood crops—including maize, wheat, rice, and potatoes—cannot. Onthe contrary, many o the high-yielding hybrid varietieso these ood crops bred during the Green Revolution othe 1960’s were selected specifically to give high yields in

response to generous applications o nitrogen ertilizer.Tis poses an additional, ormidable challenge to plantgeneticists: they must work on enhancing fixation withinthe existing symbioses. Unless they succeed, the yieldgains o the Green Revolution will be largely lost even ithe genes in legumes that equip those plants to enter into asymbiosis with nitrogen fixers are identified and isolated,and even i the transer o those gene complexes, oncethey are ound, becomes possible. Te overall task looksorbidding, but the stakes are too high not to undertake it


(A) expose the ragile nature o the oundations onwhich the high yields o modern agriculturerest

(B) argue that genetic engineering promises to leadto even higher yields than are achievable with

synthetic ertilizers(C) argue that the capacity or nitrogen-fixing

symbioses is transerable to non leguminousplants

(D) explain the reasons or and the objectiveso current research on nitrogen-fixingsymbioses

(E) describe the nature o the genes that regulatethe symbiosis between legumes and certainbacteria

21. According to the passage, there is currently no strain

o Rhizobium that can enter into a symbiosis with(A) alala(B) clover(C) maize(D) peas(E) soybeans

22. Te passage implies that which o the ollowing istrue o the bacterial genus Rhizobium?

(A) Rhizobium bacteria are ound primarily innitrogen-depleted soils.

(B) Some strains o Rhizobium are not capable o

entering into a symbiosis with any plant.(C) Newly bred varieties o legumes cannot be hosts

to any strain o Rhizobium.(D) Rhizobium bacteria cannot survive outside the

protected habitat provided by host plants.(E) Rhizobium bacteria produce some ammonia or

their own purposes.

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that which othe ollowing was the most influential actor inbringing about intensified research on nitrogenfixation?

(A) Te high yields o the Green Revolution(B) Te persistent upward surge in natural gas

prices(C) Te variety o Rhizobium strains(D) Te mechanization o modem agriculture(E) Te environmental ill effects o synthetic

ertilizers

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

15.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Which o the ollowing situations is most closelyanalogous to the situation described by the authoras one o nature’s great ironies (lines 26-29) ?

(A) Tat o a armer whose crops have ailedbecause the normal midseason rains did notmaterialize and no preparations or irrigation

had been made(B) Tat o a long-distance runner who loses a

marathon race because o a wrong turn thatcost him twenty seconds

(C) Tat o shipwrecked sailors at sea in a lieboat,with one flask o drinking water to shareamong them

(D) Tat o a motorist who runs out o gas a merefive miles rom the nearest gas station

(E) Tat o travelers who want to reach theirdestination as ast and as cheaply as possible,but find that cost increases as travel speed

increases

25. According to the passage, the ultimate goal o thecurrent research on nitrogen fixation is to develop

(A) strains o Rhizobium that can enter intosymbioses with existing varieties o wheat,rice, and other nonlegumes

(B) strains o Rhizobium that produce moreammonia or leguminous host plants than doany o the strains presently known

(C) varieties o wheat, rice, and other nonlegumesthat yield as much as do existing varieties, but

require less nitrogen(D) varieties o wheat, rice, and other nonlegumesthat maintain an adequate symbioticrelationship with nitrogen-fixing bacteria andproduce high yields

(E) high-yielding varieties o wheat, rice, and othernonlegumes that are genetically equipped tofix nitrogen rom the air without the aid obacteria

26. Te author regards the research program underdiscussion as

(A) original and extensive but ill-defined as tomethod

(B) necessary and ambitious but vulnerable toailure

(C) cogent and worthwhile but severelyunderunded

(D) prohibitively expensive but conceptually elegan(E) theoretically ascinating but practically useless

27. Most nearly parallel, in its undamental approach,to the research program described in the passagewould be a program designed to

(A) achieve greater rost resistance in rost-tenderood plants by means o selective breeding,thereby expanding those plants’ area ocultivation

(B) achieve greater yields rom ood plants byInter planting crop plants that are mutuallybeneficial

(C) find inexpensive and abundant naturalsubstances that could, without reducingyields, be substituted or expensive syntheticertilizers

(D) change the genetic makeup o ood plants thatcannot live in water with high salinity, usinggenes rom plants adapted to salt water

(E) develop, through genetic engineering, a geneticconfiguration or the major ood plants that

improves the storage characteristics o theedible portion o the plants

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 15.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) A

19) B

SECOND PASSAGE

20) D

21) C

22) E

23) B

24) C

25) D

26) B

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Whether the languages o the ancient Americanpeoples were used or expressing abstract universalconcepts can be clearly answered in the case o Nahuatl.Nahuatl, like Greek and German, is a language thatallows the ormation o extensive compounds. By thecombination o radicals or semantic elements, single

compound words can express complex conceptualrelations, ofen o an abstract universal character.Te tlamatinime (“those

also availed themselves oother orms o expression with metaphorical meaning,some probably original, some derived rom olteccoinages. O these orms the most characteristic inNahuatl is the juxtaposition o two words that, becausethey are synonyms, associated terms, or even contraries,complement each other to evoke one single idea. Usedas metaphor, the juxtaposed terms connote specific oressential traits o the being they reer to, introducing a

mode o poetry as an almost habitual orm o expression.

17. A main purpose o the passage is to

(A) delineate the unction o the tlamatinime inNahuatl society

(B) explain the abstract philosophy o the Nahuatlthinkers

(C) argue against a theory o poetic expression byciting evidence about the Nahuatl

(D) explore the rich metaphorical heritage theNahuatl received rom the oltecs

(E) describe some conceptual and aestheticresources o the Nahuatl language

18. According to the passage, some abstract universalideas can be expressed in Nahuatl by

(A) taking away rom a word any reerence toparticular instances

(B) removing a word rom its associations withother words

(C) giving a word a new and opposite meaning(D) putting various meaningul elements together

in one word(E) turning each word o a phrase into a poetic

metaphor

19. It can be inerred solely rom the inormation in thepassage that

(A) there are many languages that, like Greek orGerman, allow extensive compounding

(B) all abstract universal ideas are ideas o complexrelations

(C) some record or evidence o the thought o thetlamatinime exists

(D) metaphors are always used in Nahuatl toexpress abstract conceptual relationships

(E) the abstract terms o the Nahuatl language arehabitually used in poetry

16.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

Many theories have been ormulated to explainthe role o grazers such as zooplankton in controllingthe amount o planktonic algae (phytoplankton) inlakes. Te first theories o such grazer control weremerely based on observations o negative correlationsbetween algal and zooplankton numbers. A low

number o algal cells in the presence o a high numbero grazers suggested, but did not prove, that thegrazers had removed most o the algae. Te converseobservation, o the absence o grazers in areas o highphytoplankton concentration, led Hardy to proposehis principle o animal exclusion, which hypothesizedthat phytoplankton produced a repellent thatexcluded grazers rom regions o high phytoplanktonconcentration. Tis was the first suggestion o algaldeenses against grazing.

Perhaps the act that many o these first studiesconsidered only algae o a size that could be collected ina net (net phytoplankton), a practice that overlooked the

smaller phytoplankton (nannoplankton) that we nowknow grazers are most likely to eed on, led to a de-emphasis o the role o gr

lling algal numbers. Teseenvironmental actors were amenable to field monitoringand to simulation in the laboratory. Grazing was believedto have some effect on algal numbers, especially aferphytoplankton growth rates declined at the end o bloomperiods, but grazing was considered a minor component

o models that predicted algal population dynamics.Te potential magnitude o grazing pressure on

reshwater phytoplankton has only recently beendetermined empirically. Studies by Hargrave and Geenestimated natural community grazing rates by measuringeeding rates o individual zooplankton species in thelaboratory and then computing community grazingrates or field conditions using the known populationdensity o grazers. Te high estimates o grazing pressurepostulated by these researchers were not ully accepted,however, until the grazing rates o zooplankton weredetermined directly in the field, by means o new

experimental techniques. Using a specially preparedeeding chamber, Haney was able to record zooplanktongrazing rates in natural field conditions. In the periods opeak zooplankton abundance, that is, in the late springand in the summer, Haney recorded maximum dailycommunity grazing rates, or nutrient-poor lakes andbog lakes, respectively, o 6.6 percent and 114 percent

o daily phytoplankton production. Cladocerans hadhigher grazing rates than copepods, usually accountingor 80 percent o the community grazing rate. Teserates varied seasonally, reaching the lowest point inthe winter and early spring. Haney’s thorough researchprovides convincing field evidence that grazers can exe

significant pressure on phytoplankton population.

20. Te author most likely mentions Hardy’s principle oanimal exclusion in order to

(A) give an example o one theory about theinteraction o grazers and phytoplankton

(B) deend the first theory o algal deenses againstgrazing

(C) support the contention that phytoplanktonnumbers are controlled primarily byenvironmental actors

(D) demonstrate the superiority o laboratory

studies o zooplankton eeding rates to otherkinds o studies o such rates(E) reute researchers who believed that low

numbers o phytoplankton indicated thegrazing effect o low numbers o zooplankton

21. It can be inerred rom the passage that the “firsttheories’ o grazer control mentioned in line 4would have been more convincing i researchershad been able to

(A) observe high phytoplankton numbers undernatural lake conditions

(B) discover negative correlations between algaeand zooplankton numbers rom their fieldresearch

(C) understand the central importance oenvironmental actors in controlling thegrowth rates o phytoplankton

(D) make verifiable correlations o cause and effectbetween zooplankton and phytoplanktonnumbers

(E) invent laboratory techniques that would haveallowed them to bypass their field researchconcerning grazer control

16.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


22. Which o the ollowing, i true, would call intoquestion Hardy’s principle o animal exclusion?

(A) Zooplankton are not the only organisms thatare affected by phytoplankton repellents.

(B) Zooplankton exclusion is unrelated tophytoplankton population density.

(C) Zooplankton population density is higherduring some parts o the year than duringothers.

(D) Net phytoplankton are more likely to excludezooplankton than are nanno plankton.

(E) Phytoplankton numbers can be stronglyaffected by environmental actors.

23. Te author would be likely to agree with which othe ollowing statements regarding the pressure ograzers on phytoplankton numbers?

1. Grazing pressure can vary according to the

individual type o zooplankton.II. Grazing pressure can be lower in nutrient-poor

lakes than in bog lakes.III. Grazing tends to exert about the same pressure

as does temperature.(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

24. Te passage supplies inormation to indicate that

Hargrave and Geen’s conclusion regarding thegrazing pressure exerted by zooplankton onphytoplankton numbers was most similar to theconclusion regarding grazing pressure reached bywhich o the ollowing researchers?

(A) Hardy (B) Lund(C) Round (D) Reynolds (E) Haney

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that one wayin which many o the early researchers on grazercontrol could have improved their data would havebeen to

(A) emphasize the effects o temperature, ratherthan o light, on phytoplankton

(B) disregard nannoplankton in their analysis ophytoplankton numbers

(C) collect phytoplankton o all sizes beoreanalyzing the extent o phytoplanktonconcentration

(D) recognize that phytoplankton other than netphytoplankton could be collected in a net

(E) understand the crucial significance o netphytoplankton in the diet o zooplankton

26. According to the passage, Hargrave and Geen didwhich o the ollowing in their experiments?

(A) Tey compared the grazing rates o individualzooplankton species in the laboratory withthe natural grazing rates o these species.

(B) Tey hypothesized about the population density

o grazers in natural habitats by using dataconcerning the population density o grazersin the laboratory.

(C) Tey estimated the community grazing rates ozooplankton in the laboratory by using dataconcerning the natural community grazingrates o zooplankton.

(D) Tey estimated the natural communitygrazing rates o zooplankton by using dataconcerning the known population density ophytoplankton.

(E) Tey estimated the natural community grazing

rates o zooplankton by using laboratory dataconcerning the grazing rates o individualzooplankton species.

27. Which o the ollowing is a true statement about thezooplankton numbers and zooplankton grazingrates observed in Haney’s experiments?

(A) While zooplankton numbers began to declinein August, zooplankton grazing rates beganto increase.

(B) Although zooplankton numbers were high inMay, grazing rates did not become high until

January.(C) Both zooplankton numbers and grazing rateswere higher in December than in November.

(D) Both zooplankton numbers and grazing rateswere lower in March than in June.

(E) Both zooplankton numbers and grazing rateswere highest in February.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 16.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) E

18) D

19) C

SECOND PASSAGE

20) A

21) D

22) B

23) C

24) E

25) C

26) E

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Hydrogeology is a science dealing with theproperties, distribution, and circulation o water on thesurace o the land, in the soil and underlying rocks, andin the atmosphere. Te hydrologic cycle, a major topic inthis science, is the complete cycle o phenomena throughwhich water passes, beginning as atmospheric water

vapor, passing into liquid and solid orm as precipitation,thence along and into the ground surace, and finallyagain retu

use o geologic changes that haveisolated them underground. Tese systems are properlytermed geohydrologic but not hydrogeologic. Only whena system possesses natural or artificial boundaries thatassociate the water within it with the hydrologic cycle

may the entire system properly be termed hydrogeologic.

17. Te author’s primary purpose is most probably to

(A) present a hypothesis(B) reute an argument(C) correct a misconception(D) predict an occurrence(E) describe an enigma

18. It can be inerred that which o the ollowing is mostlikely to be the subject o study by a geohydrologist

(A) Sof, porous rock being worn away by awaterall

(B) Water depositing minerals on the banks o agorge through which the water runs

(C) Te trapping o water in a sealed undergroundrock cavern through the action o anearthquake

(D) Water becoming unfit to drink throughthe release o pollutants into it rom amanuacturing plant

(E) Te changing course o a river channel as theaction o the water wears away the rocks pastwhich the river flows

19. Te author reers to “many ormations” (lines 13-14)primarily in order to

(A) clariy a distinction(B) introduce a subject(C) draw an analogy (D) emphasize a similarity (E) resolve a conflict

16.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Te historian Frederick J. urner wrote in the 1890’sthat the agrarian discontent that had been developingsteadily in the United States since about 1870 had beenprecipitated by the closing o the internal rontier—thatis, the depletion o available new land needed or urtherexpansion o the American arming system. Not only

was urner’s thesis influential at the time, it was lateradopted and elaborated by other scholars, such as JohnD. Hicks in Te Populist Revolt (1931). Actually, however,new lands were taken up or arming in the UnitedStates throughout and beyond the nineteenth century.In the 1890’s, when agrarian discontent had becomemost acute, 1,100,000 new arms were settled, which was500,000 more than had been settled during the previousdecade. Afer 1890, under the terms o the HomesteadAct and its successors, more new land was taken up orarming than had

rming, but agricultural practiceshad become sufficiently advanced to make it possibleto increase the profitability o arming by utilizing eventhese relatively barren lands.

Te emphasis given by both scholars and statesmento the presumed disappearance o the American rontierhelped to obscure the great importance o changes inthe conditions and consequences o international tradethat occurred during the second hal o the nineteenthcentury. In 1869 the Suez Canal was opened and thefirst transcontinental railroad in the United States wascompleted. An extensive network o telegraph and

telephone communications was spun: Europe wasconnected by submarine cable with the United Statesin 1866 and with South America in 1874. By about1870 improvements in agricultural technology madepossible the ull exploitation o areas that were mostsuitable or extensive arming on a, mechanized basis.Huge tracts o land were being settled and armed inArgentina, Australia, Canada, and in the American West,and these areas were joined with one another and withthe countries o Europe into an interdependent marketsystem. As a consequence, agrarian depressions nolonger were local or national in scope, and they struck

several nations whose internal rontiers had not vanishedor were not about to vanish. Between the early 1870’sand the 1890’s, the mounting agrarian discontent inAmerica paralleled the almost uninterrupted decline inthe prices o American agricultural products on oreignmarkets. Tose staple-growing armers in the United

States who exhibited the greatest discontent were thosewho had become most dependent on oreign marketsor the sale o their products. Insoar as Americans hadbeen deterred rom taking up new land or arming, itwas because market conditions had made this period aperilous time in which to do so.


(A) showing that a certain interpretation isbetter supported by the evidence than is analternative explanation

(B) developing an alternative interpretation byusing sources o evidence that ormerly hadbeen unavailable

(C)questioning the accuracy o the evidence thatmost scholars have used to counter theauthor’s own interpretation

(D) reviewing the evidence that ormerly had been

thought to obscure a valid interpretation(E) presenting evidence in support o acontroversial version o an earlierinterpretation

21. According to the author, changes in the conditions ointernational trade resulted in an

(A) underestimation o the amount o new landthat was being armed in the United States

(B) underutilization o relatively small but richplots o land

(C) overexpansion o the world transportation

network or shipping agricultural products(D) extension o agrarian depressions beyondnational boundaries .

(E) emphasis on the importance o market orcesin determining the prices o agriculturalproducts

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

16.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


22. Te author implies that the change in the state othe American armer’s morale during the latterpart o the nineteenth century was traceable to theAmerican armer’s increasing perception that the

(A) costs o cultivating the land were prohibitivewithin the United States

(B) development o the first transcontinentalrailroad in the United States occurred at theexpense o the American armer

(C) American arming system was about to run outo the new armland that was required or itsexpansion

(D) prices o American agricultural products weredeteriorating especially rapidly on domesticmarkets

(E) proceeds rom the sales o Americanagricultural products on oreign marketswere ‘ unsatisactory

23. According to the passage, which o the ollowingoccurred prior to 1890?

(A) Frederick J. urner’s thesis regarding theAmerican rontier became influential.

(B) Te Homestead Act led to an increase in theamount o newly armed land in the UnitedStates.

(C) Te manuacturers o technologically advancedagricultural machinery rapidly increasedtheir marketing efforts.

(D) Direct lines o communication were

constructed between the United States andSouth America.(E) echnological advances made it ruitul to arm

extensively on a mechanized basis.

24. Te author implies that, afer certain territories andcountries had been joined into an interdependentmarket system in the nineteenth century, agrariandepressions within that system

(A) spread to several nations, excluding those inwhich the internal rontier remained open

(B) maniested themselves in several nations,

including those in which new land . remainedavailable or arming

(C) slowed down the pace o new technologicaldevelopments in internationalcommunications and transportation

(D) affected the local and national prices o thenonagricultural products o several nations

(E) encouraged several nations to sell more o theiragricultural products on oreign markets

25. Te author provides inormation concerning newlyarmed lands in the United States (lines 8-23)as evidence in direct support o which o theollowing?

(A) A proposal by Frederick J. urner that was laterdisputed by John D. Hicks

(B) An elaboration by John D. Hicks o a thesis thatormerly had been questioned by Frederick J.urner

(C) Te established view that was disputed by thosescholars who adopted the thesis o FrederickJ. urner

(D) Te thesis that important changes occurred inthe nature o international trade during thesecond hal o the nineteenth century

(E) Te view that the American rontier did notbecome closed during the nineteenth centuryor soon thereafer

26. Te author implies that the cause o the agrariandiscontent was

(A) masked by the vagueness o the official recordson newly settled arms

(B) overshadowed by disputes on the reliability othe existing historical evidence

(C) misidentified as a result o influential buterroneous theorizing

(D) overlooked because o a preoccupation withmarket conditions

(E) undetected because visible indications o the

cause occurred so gradually and sporadically

27. Te author’s argument implies that, compared tothe yearly price changes that actually occurredon oreign agricultural markets during the 1880’s,American armers would have most preerredyearly price changes that were

(A) much smaller and in the same direction(B) much smaller but in the opposite direction(C) slightly smaller and in the same direction(D) similar in size but in the opposite direction(E) slightly greater and in the same direction

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 16.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) C

19) A

SECOND PASSAGE

20) A

21) D

22) E

23) E

24) B

25) E

26) C

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Visual recognition involves storing and retrievingmemories. Neural activity, triggered by the eye, ormsan image in the brain’s memory system that constitutesan internal representation o the viewed object. Whenan object is encountered again, it is matched withits internal representation and thereby recognized.

Controversy surrounds the question o whetherrecognition is a parallel, one-step process or a serial,step-by-step one. Psychologists o the Gestalt schoolmaintain that objects are recognized as wholes in aparallel procedure: the internal representation is m

es more holistic and the recognition processcorrespondingly more parallel, the weight o evidenceseems to support the serial hypothesis, at least or objects

that are not notably simple and amiliar.


(A) explaining how the brain receives images(B) synthesizing hypotheses o visual recognition(C) examining the evidence supporting the serial-

recognition hypothesis(D) discussing visual recognition and some

hypotheses proposed to explain it(E) reporting on recent experiments dealing with

memory systems and their relationship toneural activity

18. According to the passage, Gestalt psychologists makewhich o the ollowing suppositions about visualrecognition?

I. A retinal image is in exactly the same orm as itsinternal representation.

II. An object is recognized as a whole without anyneed or analysis into component parts.

III. Te matching o an object with its internalrepresentation occurs in only one step.

(A) II only (B) III only (C) I and III only (D) II and III only (E) I, III and III

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that the matchingprocess in visual recognition is

(A) not a neural activity (B) not possible when an object is viewed or the

very first time(C) not possible i a eature o a amiliar object is

changed in some way (D) only possible when a retinal image is received

in the brain as a unitary whole(E) now ully understood as a combination o the

serial and parallel processes

20. In terms o its tone and orm, the passage can best becharacterized as

(A) a biased exposition(B) a speculative study (C) a dispassionate presentation(D) an indignant denial

(E) a dogmatic explanation

17.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

In large part as a consequence o the eministmovement, historians have ocused a great deal oattention in recent years on determining more accuratelythe status o women in various periods. Although muchhas been accomplished or the modern period, premoderncultures have proved more difficult: sources are restricted

in number, ragmentary, difficult to interpret, and ofencontradictory. Tus it is not particularly surprising thatsome earlier scholarship concerning such cultures has soar gone unchallenged. An example is Johann Bachoen’s1861 treatise on

s o historical act, Bachoenargued that women were dominant in many ancientsocieties. His work was based on a comprehensive surveyo reerences in the ancient sources to Amazonian andother societies with matrilineal customs—societies inwhich descent and property rights are traced through the

emale line. Some support or his theory can be ound inevidence such as that drawn rom Herodotus, the Greek“historian” o the fifh century B.C., who speaks o anAmazonian society, the Sauromatae, where the womenhunted and ought in wars. A woman in this society wasnot allowed to marry until she had killed a person in battle.

Nonetheless, this assumption that the first recorderso ancient myths have preserved acts is problematic. Ione begins by examining why ancients reer to Amazons,it becomes clear that ancient Greek descriptions o suchsocieties were meant not so much to represent observedhistorical act—real Amazonian societies—but rather

to offer “moral lessons” on the supposed outcome owomen’s rule in their own society. Te Amazons wereofen characterized, or example, as the equivalents ogiants and centaurs, enemies to be slain by Greek heroes.Teir customs were presented not as those o a respectablesociety, but as the very antitheses o ordinary Greekpractices.

Tus, I would argue, the purpose o accounts o theAmazons or their male Greek recorders was didactic,to teach both male and emale Greeks that all-emalegroups, ormed by withdrawal rom traditional society, aredestructive and dangerous. Myths about the Amazons were

used as arguments or the male-dominated status quo,in which groups composed exclusively o either sex werenot permitted to segregate themselves permanently romsociety. Bachoen was thus misled in his reliance on mythsor inormation about the status o women. Te sourcesthat will probably tell contemporary historians most aboutwomen in the ancient world are such social documents asgravestones, wills, and marriage contracts. Studies o suchdocuments have already begun to show how mistaken weare when we try to derive our picture o the ancient worldexclusively rom literary sources, especially myths.


(A) compare competing new approaches tounderstanding the role o women in ancientsocieties

(B) investigate the ramifications o Bachoen’stheory about the dominance o women in

ancient societies(C) explain the burgeoning interest among

historians in determining the actual status owomen in various societies

(D) analyze the nature o Amazonian society anduncover similarities between it and the Greekworld

(E) criticize the value o ancient myths indetermining the status o women in ancientsocieties

22. All o the ollowing are stated by the author as

problems connected with the sources or knowledgeo premodern cultures EXCEP

(A) partial completeness(B) restricted accessibility (C) difficulty o interpretation’(D) limited quantity (E) tendency toward contradiction

23. Which o the ollowing can be inerred rom thepassage about the myths recorded by the ancientGreeks?

I. Tey sometimes included portrayals o women

holding positions o power.II. Tey sometimes contained elaborate

explanations o inheritance customs.III. Tey comprise almost all o the material

available to historians about ancient Greece.(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and III only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

17.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Which o the ollowing is presented in the passage asevidence supporting the author’s view o the ancientGreeks’ descriptions o the Amazons?

(A) Te requirement that Sauromatae women killin battle beore marrying

(B) Te ailure o historians to veriy that women

were ever governors o ancient societies(C) Te classing o Amazons with giants and

centaurs(D) Te well-established unreliability o Herodotus

as a source o inormation about ancientsocieties

(E) Te recent discovery o ancient societies withmatrilineal customs

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the probablereactions o many males in ancient Greece to theidea o a society ruled by women could best be

characterized as(A) conused and dismayed(B) wary and hostile(C) cynical and disinterested(D) curious but earul(E) excited but anxious

26. Te author suggests that the main reason or thepersisting influence o Bachoen’s work is that

(A) eminists have shown little interest in ancientsocieties

(B) Bachoen’s knowledge o Amazonian culture isunparalleled

(C) reliable inormation about the ancient world isdifficult to acquire

(D) ancient societies show the best evidence o w

rn period

27. Te author’s attitude toward Bachoen’s treatise is besdescribed as one o

(A) qualified approval(B) proound ambivalence(C) studied neutrality

(D) pointed disagreement(E) unmitigated hostility

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 17.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) D

19) B

20) C

SECOND PASSAGE

21) E

22) B

23) A

24) C

25) B

26) C

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Initially the Vinaver theory that Malory’s eightromances, once thought to be undamentally unified,were in act eight independent works produced both asense o relie and an unpleasant shock. Vinaver’s theorycomortably explained away the apparent contradictionso chronology and made each romance independently

satisying. It was, however, disagreeable to find thatwhat had been thought o as one book was now eightbooks. Part o this response was the natural reactionto the disturbance o set ideas. N

o independence,but o rejecting its implications: that the romances maybe taken in any or no particular order, that they have nocumulative effect, and that they are as separate as theworks o a modern novelist.


(A) discuss the validity o a hypothesis(B) summarize a system o general principles(C) propose guidelines or uture argument(D) stipulate conditions or acceptance o an

interpretation(E) deny accusations about an apparent

contradiction

18. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorbelieves which o the ollowing about Malory’sworks?

I. Tere are meaningul links between and amongthe romances.

II. Te subtleties o the romances are obscuredwhen they are taken as one work.

III. Any contradictions in chronology amongthe romances are less important than theiroverall unity.

(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and III only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

19. Te author o the passage concedes which o theollowing about the Vinaver theory?

(A) It gives a clearer understanding o the unity oMalory’s romances.

(B) It demonstrates the irrationality o consideringMalory’s romances to be unified.

(C) It establishes acceptable links between Malory’sromances and modern novels.

(D) It unifies earlier and later theories concerningthe chronology o Malory’s romances.

(E) It makes valid and subtle comments aboutMalory’s romances.

20. It can be inerred rom the passage that, in evaluatingthe Vinaver theory, some critics were

(A) requently misled by the inconsistencies inMalory’s work

(B) initially biased by previous interpretations o

Malory’s work (C) conceptually displeased by the general

interpretation that Vinaver rejected(D) generally in agreement with Vinaver’s

comparisons between Malory and modernnovelists

(E) originally skeptical about Vinaver’s earlyconclusions with respect to modern novels

17.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

We can distinguish three different realms o matter,three levels on the quantum ladder. Te first is theatomic realm, which includes the world o atoms, theirinteractions, and the structures that are ormed bythem, such as molecules, liquids and solids, and gasesand plasmas. Tis realm includes all the phenomena

o atomic physics, chemistry, and, in a certain sense,biology. Te energy exchanges taking place in thisrealm are o a relatively low order. I these exchangesare below one electron volt, such as in the collisionsbetween molecules o the air in a room, then atoms andmolecules can be regarded as elementary particles. Tatis, they have “conditional elementarily” because theykeep their identity and do not

ter particles must beconsidered as elementary. We find examples o structures

and processes o this first rung o the quantum ladder onEarth, on planets, and on the suraces o stars.

Te next rung is the nuclear realm. Here theenergy exchanges are much higher, on the order omillions o electron volts. As long as we are dealing withphenomena in the atomic realm, such amounts o energyare unavailable, and most nuclei are inert: they do notchange. However, i one applies energies o millions oelectron volts, nuclear reactions, fission and usion, andthe processes o radioactivity occur; our elementaryparticles then are protons, neutrons, and electrons. Inaddition, nuclear processes produce neutrinos, particles

that have no detectable mass or charge. In the universe,energies at this level are available in the centers o starsand in star explosions. Indeed, the energy radiated bythe stars is produced by nuclear reactions. Te natural

radioactivity we find on Earth is the long-lived remnano the time when now-earthly matter was expelled intospace by a major stellar explosion.

Te third rung o the quantum ladder is thesub nuclear realm. Here we are dealing with energyexchanges o many billions o electron volts. We

encounter excited nucleons, new types o particles suchas mesons, heavy electrons, quarks, and gluons, and alsantimatter in large quantities. Te gluons are the quantor smallest units, o the orce (the strong orce) thatkeeps the quarks together. As long as we are dealing withe atomic or nuclear realm, these new types o particledo not occur and the nucleons remain inert. But at subnuclear energy levels, the nucleons and mesons appearto be composed o quarks, so that the quarks and gluonfigure as elementary particles.

21. Te primary topic o the passage is which o theollowing?

(A) Te interaction o the realms on the quantumladder

(B) Atomic structures ound on Earth, on otherplanets, and on the suraces o stars

(C) Levels o energy that are released in nuclearreactions on Earth and in stars

(D) Particles and processes ound in the atomic,nuclear, and sub nuclear realms

(E) New types o particles occurring in the atomicrealm

17.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


22. According to the passage, radioactivity that occursnaturally on Earth is the result o

(A) the production o particles that have nodetectable mass or electric charge

(B) high energy exchanges on the nuclear level thatoccurred in an ancient explosion in a star

(C) processes that occur in the center o the Sun,which emits radiation to the Earth

(D) phenomena in the atomic realm that causeatoms and molecules to decompose intonuclei and electrons

(E) high-voltage discharges o electricity that tookplace in the atmosphere o the Earth shortlyafer the Earth was ormed

23. Te author organizes the passage by

(A) making distinctions between two groups oparticles, those that are elementary and those

that are composite(B) explaining three methods o transerring energy

to atoms and to the smaller particles thatconstitute atoms

(C) describing several levels o processes, increasingin energy, and corresponding sets o particles,generally decreasing in size

(D) putting orth an argument concerning energylevels and then conceding that severalqualifications o that argument are necessary

(E) making several successive refinements o adefinition o elementarily on the basis o

several groups o experimental results

24. According to the passage, which o the ollowing canbe ound in the atomic realm?

(A) More than one level o energy exchange(B) Exactly one elementary particle(C) Exactly three kinds o atomic structures(D) Tree levels on the quantum ladder(E) No particles smaller than atoms

25. According to the author, gluons are not

(A) considered to be detectable(B) produced in nuclear reactions(C) encountered in sub nuclear energy exchanges(D) related to the strong orce(E) ound to be conditionally elementary

26. At a higher energy level than the sub nuclear leveldescribed, i such a higher level exists, it can beexpected on the basis o the inormation in thepassage that there would probably be

(A) excited nucleons(B) elementary mesons(C) a kind o particle without detectable mass or

charge(D) exchanges o energy on the order o millions o

electron volts(E) another set o elementary particles

27. Te passage speaks o particles as having conditionalelementarily i they

(A) remain unchanged at a given level o energyexchange

(B) cannot be decomposed into smaller constituent(C) are mathematically simpler than some other set

o particles(D) release energy at a low level in collisions.(E) belong to the nuclear level on the quantum

ladder

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 17.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) C

19) E

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) B

23) C

24) A

25) B

26) E

27) A

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Te evolution o intelligence among early largemammals o the grasslands was due in great measure tothe interaction between two ecologically synchronizedgroups o these animals, the hunting carnivores and theherbivores that they hunted. Te interaction resultingrom the differences between predator and prey led to

a general improvement in brain unctions; however,certain components o intelligence were improved armore than others.

Te kind o intelligence avored by the interplay oincreasingly smarter catchers and increasingly keenerescapers is defined by attention—that aspect o mindcarrying consciousness orward rom one momentto the next. It ranges rom a passive, ree-floatingawareness to a highly ocused, active fixation. Te rangethrough these states is

rging rom sensory systems tointegrating centers in the brain stem. From the morerelaxed to the more vigorous levels, sensitivity to novelty

is increased. Te organism is more awake, more vigilant;this increased vigilance results in the apprehension oever more subtle signals as the organism becomes moresensitive to its surroundings. Te processes o arousaland concentration give attention its direction. Arousal isat first general, with a flooding o impulses in the brainstem, then gradually the activation is channeled. Tusbegins concentration, the holding o consistent images.One meaning o intelligence is the way in which theseimages and other alertly searched inormation are usedin the con text o previous experience. Consciousnesslinks past attention to the present and permits the

integration o details with perceived ends and purposes.Te elements o intelligence and consciousness

come together marvelously to produce different stylesin predator and prey. Herbivores and carnivoresdevelop different kinds o attention related to escapingor chasing. Although in both kinds o animal,arousal stimulates the production o adrenaline andnorepinephrine by the adrenal glands, the effect inherbivores is primarily ear, whereas in carnivoresthe effect is primarily aggression. For both, arousalattunes the animal to what is ahead. Perhaps it doesnot experience orethought as we know it, but the

animal does experience something like it. Te predatoris searchingly aggressive, innerdirected, tuned by thenervous system and the adrenal hormones, but awarein a sense closer to human consciousness than, say, a

hungry lizard’s instinctive snap at a passing beetle. Usinpast events as a ramework, the large mammal predatois working out a relationship between movementand ood, sensitive to possibilities in cold trails anddistant sounds—and yesterday’s unorgotten lessons.Te herbivore prey is o a different mind. Its mood o

wariness rather than searching and its attitude o generexpectancy instead o anticipating are silk-thin veils otranquility over an explosive endocrine system.


(A) disproving the view that herbivores are lessintelligent than carnivores

(B) describing a relationship between animals’intelligence and their ecological roles

(C) establishing a direct link between early largemammals and their modern counterparts

(D) analyzing the ecological basis or the

dominance o some carnivores over othercarnivores(E) demonstrating the importance o hormones in

mental activity

18. Te author reers to a hungry lizard (line 48)primarily in order to

(A) demonstrate the similarity between the huntingmethods o mammals and those o nonmammals

(B) broaden the application o his argument byincluding an insectivore as an example’

(C) make a distinction between higher and lowerlevels o consciousness(D) provide an additional illustration o the

brutality characteristic o predators(E) offer an objection to suggestions that all animals

lack consciousness

18.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. It can be inerred rom the passage that in animalsless intelligent than the mammals discussed in thepassage

(A) past experience is less helpul in ensuringsurvival

(B) attention is more highly ocused

(C) muscular coordination is less highly developed(D) there is less need or competition among

species(E) environment is more important in establishing

the proper ratio o prey to predator

20. Te sensitivity described in lines 48-52 is most clearlyan example o

(A) “ree-floating awareness” (lines 14-15)(B) “flooding o impulses in the brain stem” (line

25)(C) “the holding o consistent images” (line 27)

(D) “integration o details with perceived ends andpurposes” (line 32)

(E) “silk-thin veils o tranquility” (lines 55-56)

21. Te author’s attitude toward the mammals discussedin the passage is best described as

(A) superior and condescending(B) lighthearted and jocular(C) apologetic and conciliatory (D) wistul and tender(E) respectul and admiring

22. Te author provides inormation that would answerwhich o the ollowing questions?

I. Why is an aroused herbivore usually earul?II. What are some o the degrees o attention in

large mammals?III. What occurs when the stimulus that causes

arousal o a mammal is removed?(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, III and III

23. According to the passage, improvement in brainunction among early large mammals resultedprimarily rom which o the ollowing?

(A) Interplay o predator and prey (B) Persistence o ree-floating awareness in animals

o the grasslands(C) Gradual dominance o Warm-blooded

mammals over cold-blooded reptiles(D) Interaction o early large mammals with less

intelligent species(E) Improvement o the capacity or memory

among herbivores and carnivores

24. According to the passage, as the process o arousalin an organism continues, all o the ollowing mayoccur EXCEP

(A) the production o adrenaline

(B) the production o norepinephrine(C) a heightening o sensitivity to stimuli(D) an increase in selectivity with respect to stimuli(E) an expansion o the range o states mediated by

the brain stem

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

ocqueville, apparently, was wrong. JacksonianAmerica was not a fluid, egalitarian society whereindividual wealth and poverty were ephemeralconditions. At least so argues E. Pessen in hisiconoclastic study o the very rich in the United Statesbetween 1825 and 1850.

Pessen does present a quantity o examples, togetherwith some rereshingly intelligible statistics, to establishthe existence o an inordinately wealthy class. Toughactive in commerce or the proessions, most o thewealthy were n

ncial panics that destroyed lesser ones.Indeed, in several cities the wealthiest one percentconstantly increased its share until by 1850 it owned halo the community’s wealth. Although these observationsare true, Pessen overestimates their importance byconcluding rom them that the undoubted progresstoward inequality in the late eighteenth century

continued in the Jacksonian period and that the UnitedStates was a class-ridden, plutocratic society even beoreindustrialization.

25. According to the passage, Pessen indicates that all othe ollowing were true o the very wealthy in theUnited States between 1825 and 1850 EXCEP:

(A) Tey ormed a distinct upper class.(B) Many o them were able to increase their

holdings.(C) Some o them worked as proessionals or in

business.(D) Most o them accumulated their own ortunes.(E) Many o them retained their wealth in spite o

financial upheavals.

26. Te author’s attitude toward Pessen’s presentation ostatistics can be best described as

(A) disapproving(B) shocked(C) suspicious(D) amused

(E) laudatory

27. Which o the ollowing best states the author’s mainpoint?

(A) Pessen’s study has overturned the previouslyestablished view o the social and economicstructure o early nineteenth-centuryAmerica.

(B) ocqueville’s analysis o the United States in theJacksonian era remains the definitive accounto this period.

(C) Pessen’s study is valuable primarily because it

shows the continuity o the social system inthe United States throughout the nineteenthcentury.

(D) Te social patterns and political power othe extremely wealthy in the United Statesbetween 1825 and 1850 are well documented

(E) Pessen challenges a view o the social andeconomic system in the United States rom1825 to 1850, but he draws conclusions thatare incorrect.

18.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 18.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) C

19) A

20) D

21) E

22) C

23) A

24) E

SECOND PASSAGE

25) D

26) E

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

“I want to criticize the social system, and to show itat work, at its most intense.” Virginia Wool ’s provocativestatement about her intentions in writing Mrs. Dallowayhas regularly been ignored by the critics, since ithighlights an aspect o her literary interests very differentrom the traditional picture o the “poetic” novelist

concerned with examining states o reverie and visionand with ollowing the intricate pathways o individualconsciousness. But Virginia Wool was a realistic as wellas a poetic novelist, a satirist and social critic as well asa visionary: literary critics’ cavalier dismissal o Wool’ssocial vision will not withstand scrutiny.

In her novels, Wool is deeply engaged by thequestions o how individuals are shaped (or deormed)by their social environments, how historical orcesimpinge on people’s lives, how class, wealth, and genderhelp to determine people’s ates. Most o her novels arerooted in a realistically rendered social setting and in aprecise historical time.

Wool ’s ocus on society has not been generallyrecognized because o her intense antipathy topropaganda in art. Te pictures o reormers in hernovels are usually satiric or sharply critical. Even whenWool is undamentally sympathetic to their causes,she portrays people anxious to reorm their societyand possessed o a message or program as arrogant ordishonest, unaware o how

ds. (Her Writer’s Diary notes: “the only honest people are the artists,” whereas“these social reormers and philanthropists ... harbor ...discreditable desires under the disguise o loving their

kind ...”) Wool detested what she called “preaching”in fiction, too, and criticized novelist D. H. Lawrence(among others) or working by this method.

Wool ’s own social criticism is expressed inthe language o observation rather than in directcommentary, since or her, fiction is a contemplative,not an active art. She describes phenomena and providesmaterials or a judgment about society and socialissues; it is the reader’s work to put the observationstogether and understand the coherent point o viewbehind them. As a moralist, Wool works by indirection,subtly undermining officially accepted mores, mocking,

suggesting, calling into question, rather than asserting,advocating, bearing witness: hers is the satirist’s art.

Wool ’s literary models were acute social observerslike Chekhov and Chaucer. As she put it in Te Common

Reader , “It is sae to say that not a single law has beenramed or one stone set upon another because oanything Chaucer said or wrote; and yet, as we read himwe are absorbing morality at every pore.” like Chaucer,Wool chose to understand as well as to judge, to knowher society root and branch—a decision . crucial in ord

to produce art rather than polemic.

17. Which o the ollowing would be the mostappropriate title or the passage?

(A) Poetry and Satire as Influences on the Novels oVirginia Wool

(B) Virginia Wool: Critic and Commentator on thewentieth century Novel

(C) rends in Contemporary Reorm Movementsas a Key to Understanding Virginia Wool ’sNovels

(D) Society as Allegory or the Individual in the

Novels o Virginia Wool (E) Virginia Wool ’s Novels: Critical Reflections onthe Individual and on Society

18. In the first paragraph o the passage, the author’sattitude toward the literary critics mentioned canbest be described as

(A) disparaging(B) ironic(C) acetious(D) skeptical but resigned(E) disappointed but hopeul

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that Wool choseChaucer as a literary model because she believedthat

(A) Chaucer was the first English author to ocuson society as a whole as well as on individualcharacters

(B) Chaucer was an honest and orthright author,whereas novelists like D. H. Lawrence didnot sincerely wish to change society

(C) Chaucer was more concerned withunderstanding his society than with calling

its accepted mores into question(D) Chaucer’s writing was greatly, i subtly, effective

in influencing the moral altitudes o hisreaders

(E) her own novels would be more widely readi, like Chaucer, she did not overtly and vehemently criticize contemporary society

18.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. It can be inerred rom the passage that the mostprobable reason Wool realistically described thesocial setting in the majority o her novels was thatshe

(A) was aware that contemporary literary criticsconsidered the novel to be the most realistic

o literary genres(B) was interested in the effect o a person’s social

milieu on his or her character and actions(C) needed to be as attentive to detail as possible in

her novels in order to support the argumentsshe advanced in them

(D) wanted to show that a painstaking fidelity inthe representation o reality did not in anyway hamper the artist

(E) wished to prevent critics rom charging thather novels were written in an ambiguous andinexact style

21. Which o the ollowing phrases best expresses thesense o the word “contemplative” as it is used inline 37 o the passage?

(A) Gradually elucidating the rational structuresunderlying accepted mores

(B) Reflecting on issues in society without prejudiceor emotional commitment

(C) Avoiding the aggressive assertion o the author’sperspective to the exclusion o the reader’s judgment

(D) Conveying a broad view o society as a whole

rather than ocusing on an isolated individualconsciousness(E) Appreciating the world as the artist sees it

rather than judging it in moral terms

22. Te author implies that a major element o thesatirist’s art is the satirist’s

(A) consistent adherence to a position o lofydisdain when viewing the oibles o humanity

(B) insistence on the helplessness o individualsagainst the social orces that seek to

determine an individual’s ate(C) cynical disbelie that visionaries can either

enlighten or improve their societies(D) undamental assumption that some ambiguity

must remain in a work o art in order or it toreflect society and social mores accurately

(E) reusal to indulge in polemic when presentingsocial mores to readers or their scrutiny


(A) Have literary critics ignored the social criticism

inherent in the works o Chekhov andChaucer?

(B) Does the author believe that Wool is solely anintrospective and visionary novelist?

(C) What are the social causes with which Woolshows hersel to be sympathetic in herwritings?

(D) Was D. H. Lawrence as concerned as Wool waswith creating realistic settings or his novels?

(E) Does Wool attribute more power to socialenvironment or to historical orces as shaperso a person’s lie?

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

It is a popular misconception that nuclear usionpower is ree o radioactivity; in act, the deuterium-tritium reaction that nuclear scientists are currentlyexploring with such zeal produces both alpha particlesand neutrons. (Te neutrons are used to produce tritiumrom a lithium blanket surrounding the reactor.) Anot

, its limits are set by the amount o availablelithium, which is about as plentiul as uranium in theEarth’s crust. Research should certainly continue oncontrolled nuclear usion, but no energy program shouldbe premised on its existence until it has proven practical.For the immediate uture, we must continue to usehydroelectric power, nuclear fission, and ossil uels tomeet our energy needs. Te energy sources already inmajor use are in major use or good reason.


(A) criticize scientists who believe that thedeuterium-tritium usion reaction can bemade easible as an energy source

(B) admonish scientists who have ailed to correctlycalculate the amount o lithium available oruse in nuclear usion reactors

(C) deend the continued short-term use o ossiluels as a major energy source

(D) caution against uncritical embrace o nuclearusion power as a major energy source

(E) correct the misconception that nuclear usionpower is entirely ree o radioactivity

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorbelieves which o the ollowing about the currentstate o public awareness concerning nuclear usionpower?

(A) Te public has been deliberately misinormedabout the advantages and disadvantages onuclear usion power.

(B) Te public is unaware o the principaladvantage o nuclear usion over nuclearfission as an energy source.

(C) Te public’s awareness o the scientificacts concerning nuclear usion power issomewhat distorted and incomplete.

(D) Te public is not interested in increasingits awareness o the advantages anddisadvantages o nuclear usion power.

(E) Te public is aware o the disadvantageso nuclear usion power but not o itsadvantages.

26. Te passage provides inormation that would answerwhich o the ollowing questions?

(A) What is likely to be the principal source odeuterium or nuclear usion power?

(B) How much incidental radiation is produced inthe deuterium-tritium usion reaction?

(C) Why are scientists exploring the deuterium-tritium usion reaction with such zeal?

(D) Why must the tritium or nuclear usion besynthesized rom lithium?

(E) Why does the deuterium-tritium reaction yieldboth alpha particles and neutrons?

27. Which o the ollowing statements concerningnuclear scientists is most directly suggested in thepassage?

(A) Nuclear scientists are not themselves aware oall o the acts surrounding the deuterium-

tritium usion reaction.(B) Nuclear scientists exploring the deuterium-

tritium reaction have overlooked key actsin their eagerness to prove nuclear usionpractical.

(C) Nuclear scientists may have overestimated theamount o lithium actually available in theEarth’s crust.

(D) Nuclear scientists have not been entirelydispassionate in their investigation o thedeuterium-tritium reaction.

(E) Nuclear scientists have insufficiently

investigated the lithium-to-tritium reactionin nuclear usion.

18.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 18.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) E

18) A

19) D

20) B

21) C

22) E

23) B

SECOND PASSAGE

24) D

25) C

26) A

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Isadora Duncan’s masterly writings on the dancereveal the depth o her determination to create a lyricorm o the art which was ree o characterization,storytelling, and the theatrical exhibition o skills.She wished to discard the traditional methods andestablished vocabularies o

odily ornamentation andstrove to use only the natural movements o her body,undistorted by acrobatic exaggeration and stimulatedonly by internal compulsion. In her recitals Duncandanced to the music o Beethoven, Wagner, and Gluck,among others, but, contrary to popular belie, she madeno attempt to visualize or to interpret the music; rather,she simply relied on it to provide the inspiration orexpressing inner eelings through movement. She didnot regard this use o music as ideal, however, believingthat she would someday dispense with music entirely.Tat day never came.

17. Te author is primarily concerned with Duncan’s

(A) masterul lyricism as expressed in her writingson the dance

(B) concerted efforts to subdue the naturalmovements o the dance

(C) belated recognition that she could not actuallyulfill all o her ideals or the dance

(D) basic standards or the dance orm that shewished to create and perorm

(E) continuous responsiveness to a popularmisconception about the nature o her newart orm

18. Te author implies that Duncan relied on music inher recitals in order to

(A) interpret musical works solely by means onatural body movements

(B) oster the illusion that music serves as aninspiration or the dance

(C) inspire the expression o inner eeling when shedanced

(D) validate the public belie that music inspires theexpression o eeling through movement

(E) counter the public belie that she made noattempt to visualize music

19. According to the passage, Duncan intended todevelop an art orm that would do all o theollowing EXCEP

(A) avoid the use o standard ballet techniques(B) revitalize an earlier established vocabulary (C) draw on internal sources o human

expressiveness(D) create intended effects without the use o

acrobatic exaggeration(E) derive inspiration solely rom inner eelings

20. It can be inerred rom the passage that which othe ollowing endeavors is LEAS compatible withDuncan’s ideals or the dance?

(A) Using music to stimulate the inspiration todance

(B) Attempting to ree an art orm o bothcharacterization and storytelling

(C) Minimizing the theatrical exhibition o skills(D) Being inspired to express inner eeling through

movement(E) Creating a lyric art orm by drawing on inner

personal resources

19.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Te recent, apparently successul, prediction bymathematical models o an appearance o El Niño,the warm ocean current that periodically developsalong the Pacific coast o South America—has excitedresearchers. Jacob Bjerknes pointed out over 20 yearsago bow winds might create either abnormally warm or

abnormally cold water in the eastern equatorial Pacific.Nonetheless, until the development o the models no onecould explain why conditions should regularly shif romone to the other, as happens in the periodic oscillationsbetween appearances o the warm El Niño and the coldso-called anti-El Niño. Te answer, at least i the currentmodel that links the behavior o the ocean to that o theatmosphere is correct, is to be ound in the ocean.

It has long been known that during an El Niño,two conditions exist: (1) unusually warm water extendsalong the eastern Pacific, principally along the coasts oEcuador and Peru, and (2) winds blow rom the westinto the warmer air rising over the warm water in the

east. Tese winds tend to create a eedback mechanismby driving the warmer surace water into a “pile” thatblocks the normal upwelling o deeper, cold water warmsthe eastern water, thus strengthening the wind stillmore. Te contribution o the model is to show that thewinds o an El Niño, which raise sea level in the east,simultaneously send a signal to the west lowering sealevel. According to the model, that signal is generated asa negative Rossby wave, a wave o depressed, or negative,sea level, that moves westward parallel to the equator at25 to 85 kilometers per day. aking months to traversethe Pacific, Rossby waves march to the western boundary

o the Pacific basin, which is modeled as a smooth wallbut in reality consists o quite irregular island chains,such as the Philippines and Indonesia.

When the waves meet the western boundary, theyare reflected, and the model predicts that Rossby waveswill be broken into numerous coastal Kelvin wavescarrying the same negative sea-level signal. Teseeventually shoot toward the equator, and then head eastward along the equator propelled by the rotation o theEarth at a speed o about 250 kilometers per day. Whenenough Kelvin waves o sufficient amplitude arriverom the western Pacific, their negative sea-level signal

overcomes the eedback mechanism tending to raisethe sea level, and they begin to drive the system into theopposite cold mode. Tis produces a gradual shif inwinds, one that will eventually send positive sea-levelRossby waves westward, waves that will eventually returnas cold cycle-ending positive Kelvin waves, beginninganother warming cycle.

21. Te primary unction o the passage as a whole is to

(A) introduce a new explanation o a physicalphenomenon

(B) explain the difference between two relatedphysical phenomena

(C) illustrate the limitations, o applying

mathematics to complicated physicalphenomena

(D) indicate the direction that research into aparticular physical phenomenon should take

(E) clariy the differences between an oldexplanation o a physical phenomenon and anew model o it.

22. Which o the ollowing best describes theorganization o the first paragraph?

(A) A theory is presented and criticized.(B) A model is described and evaluated.

(C) A result is reported and its importanceexplained.

(D) A phenomenon is noted and its significanceDebated.

(E) A hypothesis is introduced and contraryevidence presented.

23. According to the passage, which o the ollowingeatures is characteristic o an El Niño?

(A) Cold coastal water near Peru(B) Winds blowing rom the west(C) Random occurrence

(D) Worldwide effects(E) Short duration

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

19.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. According to the model presented in the passage,which o the ollowing normally signals thedisappearance o an El Niño?

(A) Te arrival in the eastern Pacific o negativesea-level Kelvin waves

(B) A shif in the direction o the winds produced

by the start o an anti-El Niño elsewhere inthe Pacific

(C) Te reflection o Kelvin waves afer they reachthe eastern boundary o the Pacific, alongEcuador and Peru

(D) An increase in the speed at which negativeRossby waves cross the Pacific

(E) Te creation o a reservoir o colder, deep oceanwater trapped under the pile o warmer,surace ocean water

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that which o the

ollowing would result airly immediately rom thecessation o the winds o an El Niño?

I. Negative Rossby waves would cease to begenerated in the eastern Pacific.

II. Te sea level in the eastern Pacific would all. III. Te surace water in the eastern Pacific would

again be cooled by being mixed with deepwater

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) I and III only

(E) I, II and III

26. Which o the ollowing, i true, would most seriouslyundermine the validity o the model o El Niño thatis presented in the passage?

(A) During some years El Niño extendssignificantly arther along the coasts oEcuador and Peru than during other years.

(B) During periods o unusually cool temperaturesalong the eastern Pacific, an El Niño is muchcolder than normal.

(C) Te normal upwelling o cold water in theeastern Pacific depends much more on thelocal characteristics o the ocean than onatmospheric conditions.

(D) Te variations in the time it takes Rossby wavesto cross the Pacific depend on the power othe winds that the waves encounter.

(E) Te western boundary o the Pacific’ basin is soirregular that it impedes most coastal Kelvin

waves rom heading eastward.

27. Te passage best supports the conclusion that duringan anti-EI Nino the astest-moving signal waves are

(A) negative Rossby waves moving east along theequator

(B) positive Rossby waves moving west along theequator

(C) negative Kelvin waves moving west along theequator

(D) positive Kelvin waves moving west along theequator

(E) positive Kelvin waves moving east along theequator

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 19.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) C

19) B

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) A

22) C

23) B

24) A

25) E

26) E

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

Historians have only recently begun to note theincrease in demand or luxury goods and services thattook place in eighteenth-century England. McKendrickhas explored the Wedgwood firm’s remarkable successin marketing luxury pottery; Plumb has written aboutthe prolieration o provincial theaters, musical estivals,

and children’s toys and books. While the act o thisconsumer revolution is hardly in doubt, three keyquestions remain: Who were the consumers? What weretheir motives? And what were the effects o the newdemand or luxuries?

An answer to the first o these has been difficultto obtain. Although it has been possible to inerrom the goods and services actually produced whatmanuacturers and servicing trades thought theircustomers wanted, only a study o relevant personaldocuments written by actual consumers will providea precise picture o who wanted what. We still need toknow how large this consumer market was and how ar

down the social scale the consumer demand or luxurygoods penetrated. With regard to this last question, wemight note in passing that Tompson, while rightlyrestoring laboring people to the stage o eighteenth-century English history, has probably exaggerated theopposition o these people to the inroads

ng people ineighteenth-century England readily shifed rom home-brewed beer to standardized beer produced by huge,heavily capitalized urban breweries.

o answer the question o why consumers became soeager to buy, some historians have pointed to the ability

o manuacturers to advertise in a relatively uncensoredpress. Tis, however, hardly seems a sufficient answer.McKendrick avors a Veblen model o conspicuousconsumption stimulated by competition or status. Te“middling sort” bought goods and services becausethey wanted to ollow ashions set by the rich. Again,we may wonder whether this explanation is sufficient.Do not people enjoy buying things as a orm o sel-gratification? I so, consumerism could be seen as aproduct o the rise o new concepts o individualismand materialism, but not necessarily o the renzy orconspicuous competition.

Finally, what were the consequences o thisconsumer demand or luxuries? McKendrick claims thatit goes a long way toward explaining the coming o theIndustrial Revolution. But does it? What, or example,does the production o high-quality pottery and toyshave to do with the development o iron manuactureor textile mills? It is perectly possible to have thepsychology and reality o a consumer society without a

heavy industrial sector.Tat uture exploration o these key questions is

undoubtedly necessary should not, however, diminishthe orce o the conclusion o recent studies: theinsatiable demand in eighteenth-century Englandor rivolous as well as useul goods and services

oreshadows our own world.

17. In the first paragraph, the author mentionsMcKendrick and Plumb most probably in order to

(A) contrast their views on the subject o luxuryconsumerism in eighteenth-century England

(B) indicate the inadequacy o historiographicalapproaches to eighteenth-century Englishhistory

(C) give examples o historians who have helped toestablish the act o growing consumerism ineighteenth-century England

(D) support the contention that key questions aboueighteenth-century consumerism remain tobe answered

(E) compare one historian’s interest in luxury goodssuch as pottery to another historian’s interestin luxury services such as musical estivals

18. Which o the ollowing items, i preserved romeighteenth-century England, would provide anexample o the kind o documents mentioned inlines 16-17?

(A) A written agreement between a supplier o raw

materials and a supplier o luxury goods(B) A diary that mentions luxury goods andservices purchased by its author

(C) A theater ticket stamped with the date andname o a particular play

(D) A payroll record rom a company thatproduced luxury goods such as pottery

(E) A newspaper advertisement describing luxurygoods and services available at a seasideresort

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

19.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. According to the passage, Tompson attributes tolaboring people in eighteenth-century Englandwhich o the ollowing attitudes toward capitalistconsumerism?

(A) Enthusiasm(B) Curiosity

(C) Ambivalence(D) Stubbornness(E) Hostility

20. In the third paragraph, the author is primarilyconcerned with

(A) contrasting two theses and offering acompromise

(B) questioning two explanations and proposing apossible alternative to them

(C) paraphrasing the work o two historians andquestioning their assumptions

(D) examining two theories and endorsing one overthe other

(E) raising several questions but implying that theycannot be answered

21. According to the passage, a Veblen model oconspicuous consumption has been used to

(A) investigate the extent o the demand or luxurygoods among social classes in eighteenth-century England

(B) classiy the kinds o luxury goods desired byeighteenth-century consumers

(C) explain the motivation o eighteenth-centuryconsumers to buy luxury goods

(D) establish the extent to which the tastes o richconsumers were shaped by the middle classesin eighteenth-century England

(E) compare luxury consumerism in eighteenth-century England with such consumerism inthe twentieth century

22. According to the passage, eighteenth-centuryEngland and the contemporary world o passage’sreaders are

(A) dissimilar in the extent to which luxuryconsumerism could be said to be widespreadamong the social classes

(B) dissimilar in their definitions o luxury goodsand services

(C) dissimilar in the extent to which luxury goodscould be said to be a stimulant o industrialdevelopment

(D) similar in their strong demand or a variety ogoods and services

(E) similar in the extent to which a middle classcould be identified as imitating the habits o awealthier class

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that the author

would most probably agree with which o theollowing statements about the relationshipbetween the Industrial Revolution and the demandor luxury goods and services in eighteenth-centuryEngland?

(A) Te growing demand or luxury goods andservices was a major actor in the coming othe Industrial Revolution.

(B) Te Industrial Revolution exploited the alreadyexisting demand or luxury goods andservices.

(C) Although the demand or luxury goods may

have helped bring about the IndustrialRevolution, the demand or luxury servicesdid not.

(D) Tere is no reason to believe that the IndustrialRevolution was directly driven by a growingdemand or luxury goods and services.

(E) Te increasing demand or luxury goods andservices was a cultural phenomenon that hasbeen conclusively demonstrated to have beenseparate rom the coming o the IndustrialRevolution.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Researchers are finding that in many ways anindividual bacterium is more analogous to a componentcell o a multi cellular organism than it is to a reeliving, autonomous organism. Anabaena, a reshwaterbacteria, is a case in point. Among photosyntheticbacteria, Anabaena is unusual: it is capable o both

photosynthesis and nitrogen fixation. Within a singlecell, these two biochemical processes are incompatible:oxygen, produced during photosynthesis, inactivatesthe nitrogenase required or nitrogen fixation. In

Anabaena communities, however, these processes cancoexist. When fixed nitrogen compounds are abundant,

Anabaena is strictly photosynthetic and its cells are allalike. When nitrogen levels are low, however, specializedcells called heterocysts are produced which lack ch

canfix nitrogen by converting nitrogen gas into a usableorm. Submicroscopic channels develop which connectthe heterocyst cells with the photosynthetic ones

and which are used or transerring cellular productsbetween the two kinds o Anabaena cells.

24. According to the passage, which o the ollowingstatements is true o bacteria that engage inphotosynthesis?

(A) Tey eventually become two autonomous cells.(B) Tey cannot normally also engage in nitrogen

fixation.(C) Oxygen normally inactivates them.(D) Cellular products are constantly transerred

between such, bacteria.(E) Tey normally lack chlorophyll.

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that celldifferentiation with in Anabaena is regulated by the

(A) amount o oxygen Anabaena cells produce(B) season o the year(C) amount o fixed nitrogen compounds available(D) number o microscopic channels uniting

Anabaena cells(E) amount o chlorophyll in Anabaena cells

26. Te passage supports which o the ollowinginerences about heterocysts?

(A) Heterocysts do not produce oxygen.(B) Nitrogen gas inactivates heterocysts.(C) Chlorophyll increases the productivity o

heterocysts.

(D) Heterocysts allow nitrogen fixation and photosynthesis to occur in the same cell.

(E) Heterocysts are more important or Anabaena’sunctioning than are photosynthetic cells.

27. Te author uses the example o Anabaena to illustratethe

(A) uniqueness o bacteria among unicellularorganisms

(B) inadequacy o an existing view o bacteria(C) ability o unicellular organisms to engage in

photosynthesis

(D) variability o a reshwater bacteria(E) difficulty o investigating even the simplest

unicellular organisms

19.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 19.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) B

19) E

20) B

21) C

22) D23) D

SECOND PASSAGE

24) B

25) C

26) A

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

A serious critic has to comprehend the particularcontent, unique structure, and special meaning o awork o art. And here she aces a dilemma. Te criticmust recognize the artistic element o uniqueness thatrequires subjective reaction; yet she must not be undulyprejudiced by such reactions. Her likes and dislikes are

less important than what the work itsel communicates,and her preerences may blind her to certain qualitieso the work and thereby prevent an adequate undergo;standing o it. Hence, it is necessary that a critic developa sensibility inormed by amiliarity with the history oarcient to treat the artwork solely historically, in relationto a fixed set o ideas or values. Te critic’s knowledgeand training are, rather, a preparation o the cognitiveand emotional abilities needed or an adequate personalresponse to an artwork’s own particular qualities.

17. According to the author, a serious art critic may

avoid being prejudiced by her subjective reactionsi she

(A) treats an artwork in relation to a fixed set oideas and values

(B) brings to her observation a knowledge o arthistory and aesthetic theory

(C) allows more time or the observation o eachartwork

(D) takes into account the preerences o other artcritics

(E) limits hersel to that art with which she hasadequate amiliarity

18. Te author implies that it is insufficient to treat awork o art solely historically because

(A) doing so would lead the critic into a dilemma(B) doing so can blind the critic to some o the

artwork’s unique qualities(C) doing so can insulate the critic rom personally

held belies(D) subjective reactions can produce a biased

response(E) critics are not sufficiently amiliar with art

history

19. Te passage suggests that the author would bemost likely to agree with which o the ollowingstatements?

(A) Art speaks to the passions as well as to theintellect

(B) Most works o art express unconscious wishes

or desires.(C) Te best art is accessible to the greatest number

o people.(D) Te art produced in the last ew decades is o

inerior quality.(E) Te meaning o art is a unction o the social

conditions in which it was produced.

20. Te author’s argument is developed primarily by theuse o

(A) an attack on sentimentality (B) an example o successul art criticism

(C) a critique o artists’ training(D) a warning against extremes in art criticism(E) an analogy between art criticism and art

production

20.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Viruses, inectious particles consisting o nucleic acidpackaged in a protein coat (the capsid), are difficult toresist. Unable to reproduce outside a living cell, virusesreproduce only by subverting the genetic mechanisms o ahost cell. In one kind o viral lie cycle, the virus first bindsto the cell’s surace, then penetrates the cell and sheds its

capsid. Te exposed viral nucleic acid produces new virusesrom the contents o the cell. Finally, the cell releases the viral progeny, and a new cell cycle o inection begins. Tehuman body responds to a viral inection by producingantibodies: complex, highly specific proteins that selectivelybind to oreign molecules such as viruses. An antibody caneither interere with a virus’ ability to bind to a cell, or canprevent it rom releasing its nucleic acid.

Unortunately, the common cold,antiviral deense.

Humans have difficulty resisting colds because rhinovirusesare so diverse, including at least 100 strains. Te strainsdiffer most in the molecular structure o the proteins in

their capsids. Since disease-fighting antibodies bind tothe capsid, an antibody developed to protect against onerhinovirus strain is useless against other strains. Differentantibodies must be produced or each strain.

A deense against rhinoviruses might nonethelesssucceed by exploiting hidden similarities among therhinovirus strains. For example, most rhinovirus strainsbind to the same kind o molecule (delta-receptors) ona cell’s surace when they attack human cells. Colonno,taking advantage o these common receptors, deviseda strategy or blocking the attachment o rhinovirusesto their appropriate receptors. Rather than ruitlessly

searching or an antibody that would bind to allrhinoviruses, Colonno realized that an antibody bindingto the common receptors o a human cell would preventrhinoviruses rom initiating an inection. Because humancells normally do not develop antibodies to componentso their own cells, Colonno injected human cells intomice, which did produce an antibody to the commonreceptor. In isolated human cells, this antibody proved tobe extraordinarily effective at thwarting the rhinovirus.Moreover, when the antibody was given to chimpanzees,it inhibited rhinoviral growth, and in humans it lessenedboth the severity and duration o cold symptoms.

Another possible deense against rhinoviruses wasproposed by Rossman, who described rhinovirusesdetailed molecular structure. Rossman showed that proteinsequences common to all rhinovirus strains lie at thebase o a deep “canyon” scoring each ace o the capsid.Te narrow opening o this canyon possibly prevents therelatively large antibody molecules rom binding to thecommon sequence, but smaller molecules might reach it.Among these smaller, non antibody molecules, some mightbind to the common sequence, lock the nucleic acid in itscoat, and thereby prevent the virus rom reproducing.

21. Te primary purpose o, the passage is to

(A) discuss viral mechanisms and possible wayso circumventing certain kinds o thosemechanisms.

(B) challenge recent research on how rhinovirusesbind to receptors on the suraces o cells.

(C) suggest uture research on rhinoviral growth inchimpanzees.

(D) deend a controversial research programwhose purpose is to discover the molecularstructure o rhinovirus capsids.

(E) evaluate a dispute between advocates o twotheories about the rhinovirus lie cycle.

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that the proteinsequences o the capsid that vary most amongstrains o rhinovirus are those

(A) at the base o the “canyon”

(B) outside o the “canyon”(C) responsible or producing nucleic acid(D) responsible or preventing the ormation o

delta-receptors(E) preventing the capsid rom releasing its nucleic

acid

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that a cell lackingdelta-receptors will be

(A) unable to prevent the rhinoviral nucleic acidrom shedding its capsid

(B) deenseless against most strains o rhinovirus

(C) unable to release the viral progeny it developsafer inection

(D) protected rom new inections by antibodies tothe rhinovirus

(E) resistant to inection by most strains orhinovirus

24. Which o the ollowing research strategies ordeveloping a deense against the common coldwould the author be likely to find most promising?

(A) Continuing to look or a general antirhinoviralantibody

(B) Searching or common cell-surace receptors inhumans and mice

(C)Continuing to look or similarities among the various strains o rhinovirus

(D) Discovering how the human body producesantibodies in response to a rhinoviralinection

(E) Determining the detailed molecular structure othe nucleic acid o a rhinovirus

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

20.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the purposeo Colonna’s experiments was to determine whether

(A) chimpanzees and humans can both be inectedby rhinoviruses

(B) chimpanzees can produce antibodies to humancell-surace receptors

(C) a rhinovirus’ nucleic acid might be locked in itsprotein coat

(D) binding antibodies to common receptorscould produce a possible deense againstrhinoviruses

(E) rhinoviruses are vulnerable to humanantibodies

26. According to the passage, Rossman’s researchsuggests that

(A) a deense against rhinoviruses might exploitstructural similarities among the strains o

rhinovirus(B) human cells normally do not develop antibodies

to components o their own cells(C) the various strains o rhinovirus differ in their

ability to bind to the surace o a host cell(D) rhinovirus versatility can work to the benefit o

researchers trying to find a useul antibody (E) Colonno’s research findings are probably invalid

27. According to the passage, in order or. a givenantibody, to bind to a given rhinoviral capsid,which o the ollowing must be true?

(A) Te capsid must have a deep “canyon” on eacho its aces.

(B) Te antibody must be specific to the molecular

structure o the particular capsid.(C) Te capsid must separate rom its nucleic acid

beore binding to an antibody.(D) Te antibody must bind to a particular cell-

surace receptor beore it can bind to arhinovirus.

(E) Te antibody must first enter a cell containingthe particular rhinovirus.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 20.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) B

19) A

20) D

SECOND PASSAGE

21) A

22) B

23) E

24) C

25) D

26) A

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Diamonds, an occasionalberlites have never been

dated satisactorily. However, some diamonds containminute inclusions o silicate minerals, commonly olivine,pyroxene, and garnet. Tese minerals can be dated byradioactive decay techniques because o the very small

quantities o radioactive trace elements they, in rum,contain. Usually, it is possible to conclude that theinclusions are older than their diamond hosts, but withlittle indication o the time interval involved. Sometimes,however, the crystal orm o the silicate inclusions isobserved to resemble more closely the internal structureo diamond than that o other silicate minerals, It is notknown how rare this resemblance is, or whether it ismost ofen seen in inclusions o silicates such as garnet,whose crystallography is general

, the resemblance isregarded as compelling evidence that the diamonds andinclusions are truly cogenetic.

17. Te author implies that silicate inclusions were mostofen ormed

(A) with small diamonds inside o them(B) with trace elements derived rom their host

minerals(C) by the radioactive decay o rare igneous rocks(D) at an earlier period than were their host

minerals(E) rom the crystallization o rare igneous material

18. According to the passage, the age o silicate mineralsincluded in diamonds can be determined due to aeature o the

(A) trace elements in the diamond hosts(B) trace elements in the rock surrounding the

diamonds

(C) trace elements in the silicate minerals(D) silicate minerals’ crystal structure(E) host diamonds’ crystal structure

19. Te author states that which o the ollowinggenerally has a crystal structure similar to that odiamond?

(A) Lamproite(B) Kimberlite(C) Olivine(D) Pyroxene(E) Garnet

20. Te main purpose o the passage is to

(A) explain why it has not been possible todetermine the age o diamonds

(B) explain how it might be possible to date somediamonds

(C) compare two alternative approaches todetermining the age o diamonds

(D) compare a method o dating diamonds with amethod used to date certain silicate minerals

(E) compare the age o diamonds with that ocertain silicate minerals contained within

them

20.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

Discussion o the assimilation o Puerto Ricans in theUnited States has ocused on two actors: social standingand the loss o national culture. In general, excessive stressis placed on one actor or the other, depending on whetherthe commentator is North American or Puerto Rican. ManyNorth American social scientists, such as Oscar Handlin,

Joseph Fitzpatrick, and Oscar Lewis, consider PuertoRicans as the most recent in a long line o ethnic entrantsto occupy the lowest rung on the social ladder. Such a“sociodemographic” approach tends to regard assimilationas a benign process, taking or granted increased economicadvantage and inevitable cultural integration, in asupposedly egalitarian context. However, this approachails to take into account the colonial nature o thePuerto Rican case, with this group, unlike their Europeanpredecessors, coming rom a nation politically subordinatedto the United States. Even the “radical” critiques o thismainstream research model, such as the critique developedin Divided Society , attach the issue o ethnic assimilation

too mechanically to actors o economic and social mobilityand are thus unable to illuminate the cultural subordinationo Puerto Ricans as a colonial minority.

In contrast, the “colonialist” approach o island-basedwriters such as Eduardo Seda-Bonilla, Manuel Maldonado-Denis, and Luis Nieves-Falcon tends to view assimilationas the orced loss o national culture in an unequal contestwith imposed oreign values. Tere is, o course, a strongtradition o cultural accommodation among other PuertoRican thinkers. Te writings o Eugenio FernándezMéndez clearly exempliy this tradition, and manysupporters o Puerto Rico’s commonwealth status share

the same universalizing orientation. But the Puerto Ricanintellectuals who have written most about the assimilationprocess in the United States all advance cultural nationalist views, advocating the preservation o minority culturaldistinctions and rejecting what they see as the subjugationo colonial national

inkers misdirect it, overlooking the

class relations at work in both Puerto Rican and NorthAmerican history. Tey pose the clash o national culturesas an absolute polarity, with each culture understood asstatic and undifferentiated. Yet both the Puerto Rican and

North American traditions have been subject to constantchallenge rom cultural orces within their own societies,orces that may move toward each other in ways that cannotbe written off as mere “assimilation.” Consider, or example,the indigenous and Aro Caribbean traditions in PuertoRican culture and how they influence and are influenced byother Caribbean cultures and Black cultures in the UnitedStates. Te elements o coercion and inequality, so centralto cultural contact according to the colonialist ramework,play no role in this kind o convergence o racially andethnically different elements o the same social class.

21. Te author’s main purpose is to

(A) criticize the emphasis on social standing indiscussions o the assimilation o PuertoRicans in the United States

(B) support the thesis that assimilation has not beena benign process or Puerto Ricans

(C) deend a view o the assimilation o PuertoRicans that emphasizes the preservation onational culture

(D) indicate deficiencies in two schools o thoughton the assimilation o Puerto Ricans in theUnited States

(E) reject the attempt to ormulate a general ramework or discussion o the assimilation oPuerto Ricans in the United States

22. According to the passage, cultural accommodation ispromoted by

(A) Eduardo Seda-Bonilla(B) Manuel Maldonado-Denis(C) the author o Divided Society (D) the majority o social scientists writing on

immigration(E) many supporters o Puerto Rico’s common

wealth status

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that a writersuch as Eugenio Fernández Méndez would mostlikely agree with which o the ollowing statementsconcerning members o minority ethnic groups?

(A) It is necessary or the members o such groupsto adapt to the culture o the majority.

(B) Te members o such groups generallyencounter a culture that is static andundifferentiated.

(C) Social mobility is the most important eature othe experience o members o such groups.

(D) Social scientists should emphasize the culturaland political aspects o the experience omembers o such groups.

(E) Te assimilation o members o such groupsrequires the orced abandonment o then

authentic national roots.

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

20.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Te author implies that the Puerto Rican writers whohave written most about assimilation do NO dowhich o the ollowing?

(A) Regard assimilation as benign.(B) Resist cultural integration.(C) Describe in detail the process o assimilation.

(D) ake into account the colonial nature o thePuerto Rican case.

(E) Criticize supporters o Puerto Rico’s commonwealth status.

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the“colonialist” approach is so called because itspractitioners

(A) support Puerto Rico’s commonwealth status(B) have a strong tradition o cultural

accommodation(C) emphasize the class relations at work in both

Puerto Rican and North American history (D) pose the clash o national cultures as an

absolute polarity in which each culture isunderstood as static and undifferentiated

(E) regard the political relation o Puerto Rico tothe United States as a significant actor in theexperience o Puerto Ricans

26. Te author regards the emphasis by island-basedwriters on the cultural and political dimensions oassimilation as

(A) ironic(B) dangerous(C) fitting but misdirected

(D) illuminating but easily misunderstood(E) peculiar but benign

27. Te example discussed in lines 47-51 is intended bythe author to illustrate a

(A) strength o the sociodemographic approach(B) strength o the “colonialist” approach(C) weakness o the sociodemographic approach(D) weakness o the “colonialist” approach(E) weakness o the cultural-accommodationist

approach

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 20.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) C

19) E

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) E

23) A

24) A

25) E

26) C27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Geologists have long known that the Earth’smantle is heterogeneous, but its spatial arrangementremains unresolved—is the mantle essentially layeredor irregularly heterogeneous? Te best evidence orthe layered mantle thesis is the well-established actthat volcanic rocks ound on oceanic islands, islands

believed to result rom mantle plumes arising rom thelower mantle, are composed o material undamentallydifferent rom that o the midocean ridge system, whosesource, most geologists contend, is the upper mantle.

Some geologists, however, on the basis oobservations concerning mantle xenoliths, argue that themantle is not layered, but that heterogeneity is createdby fluids rich in “incompatible elements” (elementstending toward liquid r

ginatively, that thisdebate can be resolved through urther study, and that

the underexplored midocean ridge system is the key.

17. Which o the ollowing best expresses the main ideao the passage?

(A) Current theories regarding the structure othe Earth’s mantle cannot account or newdiscoveries regarding the composition omantle xenoliths.

(B) Tere are conflicting hypotheses about theheterogeneity o the Earth’s mantle becauseew mantle elements have been thoroughlystudied.

(C) Further research is needed to resolve the debateamong geologists over the composition o themidocean ridge system.

(D) Tere is clear-cut disagreement within thegeological community over the structure othe Earth’s mantle.

(E) Tere has recently been a strong and excitingchallenge to geologists’ long-standing beliein the heterogeneity o the Earth’s mantle.

18. According to the passage, it is believed that oceanicislands are ormed rom

(A) the same material as mantle xenoliths(B) the same material as the midocean ridge system(C) volcanic rocks rom the upper mantle(D) incompatible elements percolating up rom the

lower mantle(E) mantle plumes arising rom the lower mantle

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that thesupporters o the “layered-mantle” theory believewhich o the ollowing?

I. Te volcanic rocks on oceanic islands arecomposed o material derived rom the lowerpart o the mantle.

II. Te materials o which volcanic rocks on oceanicislands and midocean ridges are composedare typical o the layers rom which they are

thought to originate.III. Te differences in composition between

volcanic rocks on oceanic islands and themidocean ridges are a result o differentconcentrations o incompatible elements.

(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

20. Te authors suggest that their proposal or

determining the nature o the mantle’sheterogeneity might be considered by many to be

(A) pedestrian(B) controversial(C) unrealistic(D) novel(E) paradoxical

21.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Many literary detectives have pored over a great puzzleconcerning the writer Marcel Proust: what happened in 1909?How did Contre Saint-Beuve, an essay attacking the methodso the critic Saint-Beuve, turn into the start o the novelRemembrance of Tings Past ? A recently published letter romProust to the editor Vallette confirms that Fallois, the editor

o the 1954 edition o Contre Saint-Beuve, made an essentiallycorrect guess about the relationship o the essay to the novel.Fallois proposed that Proust had tried to begin a hovel in1908, abandoned it or what was to be a long demonstrationo Saint-Bcuve’s blindness to the real nature o great writing,ound the essay giving rise to personal memories and fictionaldevelopments, and allowed these to take over in a steadilydeveloping novel.

Draf passages in Proust’s 1909 notebooks indicate thatthe transition rom essay to novel began in Contre Saint-Beuve, when Proust introduced several examples to showthe powerul influence that involuntary memory exerts overthe creative imagination. In effect, in trying to demonstrate

that the imagination is more proound and less submissiveto the intellect than Saint-Beuve assumed, Proust elicited vital memories o his own and, finding subtle connectionsbetween them, began to amass the material or Remembrance.By August, Proust was writing to Vallette, inorming himo his intention to develop th

emembrance o spontaneous andapparently random associations o Proust’s subconscious. Asincidents and reflections occurred to Proust, he continuallyinserted new passages altering and expanding his narrative.But he ound it difficult to control the drif o his inspiration.

Te very richness and complexity o the meaningulrelationships that kept presenting and rearranging themselveson all levels, rom abstract intelligence to proounddreamy eelings, made it difficult or Proust to set them outcoherently. Te beginning o control came when he saw howto connect the beginning and the end o his novel.

Intrigued by Proust’s claim that he had “begun andfinished” Remembrance at the same time, Henri Bonnetdiscovered that parts o Remembrance’s last book wereactually started in 1909. Already in that year, Proust haddrafed descriptions o his novel’s characters in their old agethat would appear in the final book o Remembrance, where

the permanence o art is set against the ravages o time. Teletter to Vallette, drafs o the essay and novel, and Bonnet’sresearches establish in broad outline the process by whichProust generated his novel out o the ruins o his essay. Butthose o us who hoped, with Kolb, that Kolb’s newly publishedcomplete edition o Proust’s correspondence or 1909 woulddocument the process in greater detail are disappointed. Foruntil Proust was confident that he was at last in sight o a viable structure or Remembrance, he told ew correspondentsthat he was producing anything more ambitious than ContreSaint-Beuve.

21. Te passage is primarily concerned with

(A) the role o involuntary memory in Proust’swriting

(B) evidence concerning the genesis o Proust’snovel Remembrance of Tings Past

(C) conflicting scholarly opinions about the value

o studying the drafs o Remembrance ofTings Past

(D) Proust’s correspondence and what it revealsabout Remembrance of Tings Past

(E) the influence o Saint-Beuve’s criticism onProust’s novel Remembrance of Tings Past

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that all o theollowing are literary detectives who have tried,by means o either scholarship or criticism, tohelp solve the “great puzzle” mentioned in line 1EXCEP

(A) Bardèche(B) Bonnet(C) Fallois(D) Kolb(E) Vallette

23. According to the passage, in drafs o Contre Saint-Beuve Proust set out to show that Saint-Beuve madwhich o the ollowing mistakes as a critic?

I. Saint-Beuve made no effort to study thedevelopment o a novel through its drafs anrevisions.

II. Saint-Beuve assigned too great a role in thecreative process to a writer’s consciousintellect.

III. Saint-Beuve concentrated too much on plotsand not enough on imagery and otherelements o style.

(A) II only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) I and III only (E) I, II and III only

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

21.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Which o the ollowing best states the author’sattitude toward the inormation that scholars havegathered about Proust’s writing in 1909?

(A) Te author is disappointed that no newdocuments have come to light since Fallois’sspeculations.

(B) Te author is dissatisfied because there are toomany gaps and inconsistencies in the drafs.

(C) Te author is confident that Fallois’s 1954 guesshas been proved largely correct, but regretsthat still more detailed documentationconcerning Proust’s transition rom the essayto the novel h

esigning and writing thenovel was probably ar more deliberate thanFallois’s description o the process would

suggest.(E) Te author is satisfied that the acts o Proust’slie in 1909 have been thoroughly established,but believes such documents as drafs andcorrespondence are only o limited value in acritical assessment o Proust’s writing.

25. Te author o the passage implies that which o theollowing would be the LEAS useul source oinormation about Proust’s transition rom workingon Contre Saint-Beuve to having a viable structureor Remembrance of Tings Past ?

(A) Fallois’s comments in the 1954 edition o ContreSaint-Beuve(B) Proust’s 1909 notebooks, including the drafs o

Remembrance of Tings Past (C) Proust’s 1909 correspondence, excluding the

letter to Vallette(D) Bardèche’s Marcel Proust, romancier (E) Bonnet’s researches concerning Proust’s drafs

o the final book o Remembrance of TingsPast

26. Te passage offers inormation to answer which othe ollowing question?

(A) Precisely when in 1909 did Proust decide toabandon Contre Saint-Beuve?

(B) Precisely when in 1909 did Proust decideto connect the beginning and the end o

Remembrance of Tings Past ?(C) What was the subject o the novel that Proust

attempted in 1908?(D) What specific criticisms o Saint-Beuve appear,

in fictional orm, in Remembrance of TingsPast ?

(E) What is a theme concerning art that appearsin the final book o Remembrance of TingsPast ?

27. Which o the ollowing best describes therelationship between Contre Saint-Beuve and

Remembrance of Tings Past as it is explained in thepassage?

(A) Immediately afer abandoning Contre Saint-Beuve, at Vallette’s suggestion, Proust startedRemembrance as a fictional demonstrationthat Saint-Beuve was wrong about theimagination.

(B) Immediately afer abandoning Contre Saint-Beuve, at Vallette’s suggestion, Proust turnedhis attention to Remembrance, starting withincidents that had occurred to him whileplanning the essay.

(C) Despondent that he could not find a coherentstructure or Contre Saint-Beuve, an essayabout the role o memory in fiction, Proustbegan instead to write Remembrance, a noveldevoted to important early memories.

(D) While developing his argument about theimagination in Contre Saint-Beuve, Proustdescribed and began to link together personamemories that became a oundation orRemembrance.

(E) While developing his argument about memoryand imagination in Contre Saint-Beuve,Proust created fictional characters to embodythe abstract themes in his essay.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 21.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) E

19) C

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) E

23) A

24) C

25) C

26) E

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


raditional research has conronted only Mexicanand United States interpretations o Mexican-Americanculture. Now we must also examine the culture as weMexican Americans have experienced it, passing roma sovereign people to compatriots with newly arrivingsettlers to, finally, a conquered people—a charter

minority on our own land.When the Spanish first came to Mexico, theyintermarried with and absorbed the culture o theindigenous Indians. Tis policy o colonization throughacculturation was continued when Mexico acquiredexas in the early 1800’s and brought the indigenousIndians into Mexican lie and government In the1820’s,United States citizens migrated to exas, attracted byland suitab

ntial, their policy o acquiring land bysubduing native populations began to dominate. Te twoideologies clashed repeatedly, culminating in a militaryconflicted that led to victory or the United States. Tus,

suddenly deprived o our parent culture, we had toevolve uniquely Mexican-American modes o thoughtand action in order to survive.

17. Te author’s purpose in writing this passage isprimarily to

(A) suggest the motives behind Mexican andUnited States intervention in exas

(B) document certain early objectives o Mexican-American society

(C) provide a historical perspective or a newanalysis o Mexican-American culture

(D) appeal to both Mexican and United Statesscholars to give greater consideration toeconomic interpretations o history

(E) bring to light previously overlooked research onMexican Americans

18. Te author most probably uses the phrase “charterminority” (lines 6-7) to reinorce the idea thatMexican Americans

(A) are a native rather than an immigrant group inthe United States

(B) played an active political role when exas firstbecame part o the United States

(C) recognized very early in the nineteenth centurythe need or official confirmation o theirrights o citizenship

(D) have been misunderstood by scholars trying tointerpret their culture

(E) identiy more closely with their Indian heritagethan with their Spanish heritage

19. According to the passage, a major difference betweenthe colonization policy o the United States andthat o Mexico in exas in the 1800’s was the

(A) degree to which policies were based ontradition

(B) orm o economic interdependency between

different cultural groups(C) number o people who came to settle new areas(D) treatment o the native inhabitants(E) relationship between the military and the

settlers

20. Which o the ollowing statements most clearlycontradicts the inormation in this passage?

(A) In the early 1800’s, the Spanish committedmore resources to settling Caliornia than todeveloping exas.

(B) While exas was under Mexican control, the

population o exas quadrupled in spite othe act that Mexico discouraged immigrationrom the United States.

(C) By the time Mexico acquired exas, manyIndians had already married people oSpanish heritage.

(D) Many Mexicans living in exas returned toMexico afer exas was annexed by theUnited States.

(E) Most Indians living in exas resisted Spanishacculturation and were either killed orenslaved.

21.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Tis passage was adapted rom an article published in 1982.

Until about five years ago, the very idea that peptidehormones might be made anywhere in the brain besides thehypothalamus was astounding. Peptide hormones, scientiststhought, were made by endocrine glands and the hypothalamus

was thought to be the brains’ only endocrine gland. What ismore, because peptide hormones cannot cross the blood-brainbarrier, researchers believed that they never got to any part othe brain other than the hypothalamus, where they were simplyproduced and then released into the bloodstream.

But these belies about peptide hormones were questionedas laboratory afer laboratory ound that antiserums to peptidehormones, when injected into the brain, bind in places otherthan the hypothalamus, indicating that either the hormonesor substances that cross-react with the antiserums are present.Te immunological method o detecting peptide hormones bymeans o antiserums, however, is imprecise. Cross-reactionsare possible and this method cannot determine whether the

substances detected by the a

tion in the body where the detectedsubstances are actually produced.

New techniques o molecular biology, however, provide away to answer these questions. It is possible to make specificcomplementary DNA’s (cDNA’s) that can serve as molecularprobes to seek out the messenger RNA’s (mRNA’s) o the peptidehormones. I brain cells are making the hormones, the cellswill contain these mRNA’s. I the products the brain cells makeresemble the hormones but are not identical to them, then thecDNA’s should still bind to these mRNA’s, but should not bind

as tightly as they would to mRNA’s or the true hormones. Tecells containing these mRNA’s can then be isolated and theirmRNA’s decoded to determine just what their protein productsare and how closely the products resemble the true peptidehormones.

Te molecular approach to detecting peptide hormonesusing cDNA probes should also be much aster than theimmunological method because it can take years o tediouspurifications to isolate peptide hormones and then developantiserums to them. Roberts, expressing the sentiment o manyresearchers, states: “I was trained as an endocrinologist. Butit became clear to me that the field o endocrinology needed

molecular biology input. Te process o grinding out proteinpurifications is just too slow.”

I, as the initial tests with cDNA probes suggest, peptidehormones really are made in the brain in areas other thanthe hypothalamus, a theory must be developed that explainstheir unction in the brain. Some have suggested that thehormones are all growth regulators, but Rosen’s work on ratbrains indicates that this cannot be true. A number o otherresearchers propose that they might be used or intercellularcommunication in the brain.

21. Which o the ollowing titles best summarizes thepassage

(A) Is Molecular Biology the Key to UnderstandIntercellular Communication in the Brain

(B) Molecular Biology: Can Researchers Exploit echniques to Synthesize Peptide Hormon

(C) Te Advantages and Disadvantages o theImmunological Approach to DetectingPeptide Hormones

(D) Peptide Hormones: How Scientists AreAttempting to Solve Problems o TeirDetection and to Understand Teir Functi

(E) Peptide Hormones: Te Role Played byMessenger RNA’s in Teir Detection

22. Te passage suggests that a substance detected in tbrain by use o antiserums to peptide hormonesmay

(A) have been stored in the brain or a long perioo time

(B) play no role in the unctioning o the brain(C) have been produced in some part o the bod

other than the brain(D) have escaped detection by molecular method(E) play an important role in the unctioning o t

hypothalamus

23. According to the passage, confirmation o the belithat peptide hormones are made in the brain inareas other than the hypothalamus would orce

scientists to(A) reject the theory that peptide hormones are

made by endocrine glands(B) revise their belies about the ability o anti

serums to detect peptide hormones(C) invent techniques that would allow them to

locate accurately brain cells that producepeptide hormones

(D) search or techniques that would enable themto distinguish peptide hormones rom theclose relatives

(E) develop a theory that explains the role played

peptide hormones in the brain

ine

(5)

10)

15)

20)

25)

30)

35)

40)

45)

50)

21.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Which o the ollowing is mentioned in the passageas a drawback o the immunological method odetecting peptide hormones?

(A) It cannot be used to detect the presence ogrowth regulators in the brain.

(B) It cannot distinguish between the peptide

hormones and substances that are verysimilar to them.

(C) It uses antiserums that are unable to cross theblood-brain barrier.

(D) It involves a purification process that requiresextensive training in endocrinology

(E) It involves injecting oreign substances directlyinto the bloodstream.

25. Te passage implies that, in doing research on ratbrains, Rosen discovered that

(A) peptide hormones are used or intercellular

communication(B) complementary DNA’s do not bind to cells

Producing peptide hormones(C) products closely resembling peptide hormones

are not identical to peptide hormones(D) some peptide hormones do not unction as

growth regulators(E) antiserums cross-react with substances that are

not peptide hormones

26. Which o the ollowing is a way in which theimmunological method o detecting peptidehormones differs rom the molecular method?

(A) Te immunological method uses substancesthat react with products o hormoneproducing cells, whereas the molecular

method uses substances that react with aspecific component o the cells themselves.

(B) Te immunological method has producedresults consistent with long-held belies aboutpeptide hormones, whereas the molecularmethod has produced results that upset thesebelies.

(C) Te immunological method requires a greatdeal o expertise, whereas the molecularmethod has been used’ successully by nonspecialists.

(D) Te immunological method can only be used

to test or the presence o peptide hormoneswithin the hypothalamus, whereas themolecular method can be used throughoutthe brain:

(E) Te immunological method uses probes thatcan only bind with peptide hormones,whereas the molecular method uses probesthat bind with peptide hormones andsubstances similar to them.

27. Te idea that the field o endocrinology can gainrom developments in molecular biology isregarded by Roberts with

(A) incredulity (B) derision(C) indifference(D) pride(E) enthusiasm

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 21.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) C

18) A

19) D

20) E

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) C

23) E

24) B

25) D

26) A

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Our visual perception depends on the reception oenergy reflecting or radiating rom that which we wish toperceive. I our eyes could receive and measure infinitelydelicate sense-data, we could perceive the world withinfinite precision. Te natural limits o our eyes have,o course, been extended by mechanical instruments;

telescopes and microscopes, or example, expand ourcapabilities greatly. Tere is, however, an ultimate limitbeyond which no instrument can take us; this limit isimposed by our inability to receive sense-data smallerthan those conveyed by an individual quantum oenergy. Since, these quanta are believed to be indivisiblepackages o energy and so cannot be ur

on to a canvas.We might think that we could avoid this limitation

by using quanta with extremely long wavelengths;such quanta would be sufficiently sensitive to convey

extremely delicate sense-data. And these quanta wouldbe useul, as long as we only wanted to measure energy,but a completely accurate perception o the world willdepend also on the exact measurement o the lengthsand positions o what we wish to perceive. For this,quanta o extremely long wavelengths are useless. omeasure a length accurately to within a millionth o aninch, we must have a measure graduated in millionthso an inch; a yardstick graduated in inches is useless.Quanta with a wavelength o one inch would be, in asense, measures that are graduated in inches. Quantao extremely long wavelength are useless in measuring

anything except extremely large dimensions.Despite these difficulties, quanta have important

theoretical implications or physics. It used to besupposed that, in the observation o nature, the universecould be divided into two distinct parts, a perceivingsubject and a perceived object. In physics, subjectand object were supposed to be entirely distinct, sothat a description o any part o the universe wouldbe independent o the observer. Te quantum theory,however, suggests otherwise, or every observationinvolves the passage o a complete quantum romthe object to the subject, and it now appears that this

passage constitutes an important coupling between

observer and observed. We can no longer make a sharpdivision between the two in an effort to observe natureobjectively. Such an attempt at objectivity would distorthe crucial interrelationship o observer and observedas parts o a single whole. But, even or scientists, it isonly in the world o atoms that this new development

makes any appreciable difference in the explanation oobservations.


(A) discuss a problem that hinders precise,perception o the world

(B) point out the inadequacies o accepted units omeasurement

(C) criticize attempts to distinguish betweenperceiving subjects and perceived objects

(D) compare and contrast rival scientifichypotheses about how the world should be

measured and observed(E) suggest the limited unction o sensoryobservation

18. According to the passage, quanta with an extremelylong wavelength cannot be used to give completeinormation about the physical world because they

(A) exist independently o sense-data(B) are graduated only in inches(C) have an insignificant amount o energy (D) cannot, with present-day instruments, be

isolated rom quanta o shorter wavelength

(E) provide an insufficiently precise means omeasuring length and position

22.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. Which o the ollowing describes a situation mostanalogous to the situation discussed in lines 8-12bold orm?

(A) A mathematician can only solve problemsthe solution o which can be deduced romknown axioms.

(B) An animal can respond to no command that ismore complicated syntactically than any ithas previously received.

(C) A viewer who has not learned, or at leastintuitively, the conventions o painting,cannot understand perspective in a drawing.

(D) A sensitized film will record no detail on a scalethat is smaller than the grain o the film.

(E) A shadow cast on a screen by an opaque objectwill have a sharp edge only i the light sourceis small or very distant.

20. Te author uses the analogy o the child’s drawing (inlines 15-16) primarily in order to

(A) illustrate the ultimate limitation in the precisiono sense-data conveyed by quanta

(B) show the sense o helplessness scientists eel inthe ace o significant observational problems

(C) anticipate the objections o those scientistswho believe that no instrumental aid toobservation is entirely reliable

(D) exempliy the similarities between packages oenergy and varieties o color

(E) disparage those scientists who believe that

measurement by means o quanta offers anaccurate picture o the world

21. Te author implies that making a sharp divisionbetween subject and object in physics is

(A) possible in a measurement o an object’s lengthand position, but not in a measurement o itsenergy

(B) still theoretically possible in the small-scaleworld o atoms and electrons

(C) possible in the case o observations involvingthe passage o a complete quantum

(D) no longer an entirely accurate way to describeobservation o the universe

(E) a goal at which scientists still aim

22. Te author’s use o the phrase “in a sense” (in lines29-30) implies which o the ollowing?

(A) Quanta o extremely long wavelength areessentially graduated in inches.

(B) Quanta o one-inch wavelength are notprecisely analogous to yardsticks graduated

in inches.(C) Quanta o extremely long wavelength, in at

least one respect, resemble quanta o shorterwavelength.

(D) Quanta o one-inch wavelength and quanta oextremely long wavelength do not differ onlyin their wavelengths.

(E) Quanta o one-inch wavelength must bemeasured by different standards than quantao extremely long wavelength.

23. According to the passage, the quantum theory can be

distinguished rom previous theories o physics byits

(A) insistence on scrupulously precisemathematical ormulations

(B) understanding o the inherent interrelationshipo perceiver and perceived

(C) recognition o the need or sophisticatedinstruments o measurement

(D) emphasis on small-scale rather than on large-scale phenomena

(E) regard or philosophical issues as well as orstrictly scientific ones

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

illie Olsen’s fiction and essays have been widelyand rightly acknowledged as major contributions toAmerican literature. Her work has been particularly valued by contemporary eminists. Yet ew o Olsen’sreaders realize the extent to which her vision and choiceo subject are rooted in an earlier literary heritage—the

tradition o radical political thought, mostly socialistand anarchist, o the 1910s and 1920’s, and the OldLef tradition o the 1930s. I do not mean that one canadequately explain the eloquence o her work in termso its political origins, or that lef-wing politics were thesingle most important influence on it. My point is thatits central consciousness—its proound understanding oclass and gender as shaping influences on people’s lives—owes much to that earlier literary heritage, a heritagethat, in general, has not been sufficiently valued by mostcontemporary litera

en’s understanding o class andgender is her greatest gif as a writer

(B) acknowledge Olsen’s importance as the leadingspokesperson or a radical literary heritage

(C) point out a literary heritage to which Olsen’swork is related

(D) urge literary critics to investigate the origins oa literary heritage

(E) suggest that Olsen’s work has been placed in aliterary heritage to which it does not belong

25. According to the author, which o the ollowing istrue o the heritage mentioned in the passage?

(A) It emphasizes gender as the determinateinfluence on people’s lives.

(B) It has been the most important influence onOlsen’s work.

(C) It includes political traditions that span threedecades o the twentieth century.

(D) It explains the eloquence but not the subjectmatter o Olsen’s work.

(E) It reflects primarily the development o socialistpolitical thought in the early twentiethcentury.

26 In the sentence “I do not… influence on it”, (in lines9-12) the author does which o the ollowing?

(A) Broadens an existing classification.(B) Contradicts the passage’s central thesis.(C) Qualifies a commonly accepted point o view.(D) Presents conflicting explanations or a

phenomenon.(E) Denies possible interpretations o an earlier

assertion.

27. According to the author, Olsen’s work has been

(A) rightly acknowledged or its contribution topolitical thought.

(B) thought to represent the beginning o a newliterary tradition.

(C) a needed impetus or social change.(D) most clearly influenced by eminism.(E) deservedly admired by readers.

22.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 22.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) E

19) D

20) A

21) D

22) B

23) B

SECOND PASSAGE

24) C

25) C

26) E

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Currently, the paramount problem in the field obiomaterials, the science o replacing diseased tissuewith human-made implants, is control over the interace,or surace, between implanted biomaterials and livingtissues. Te physical properties o most tissues can bematched by careul selection o raw materials: metals,

ceramics, or several varieties o polymer materials.Even the requirement that biomaterials processed romthese materials be nontoxic to host tissue can be met bytechniques derived rom studying the reactions o tissuecultures to biomaterials or rom short-term implants.But achieving nec

o which molecules control thebonding o cells to each other—an area that we have notyet explored thoroughly. Although recent research hasallowed us to stabilize the tissue-biomaterial interaceby controlling either the chemical reactions or themicrostructure o the biomaterials, our undamental

understanding o how implant devices adhere to tissuesremains woeully incomplete.

17. According to the passage, the major problemcurrently acing scientists in the field obiomaterials is

(A) assessing and regulating the bonding betweenhost tissue and implants

(B) controlling the transer o potentially toxicmaterials across the interace o tissue andimplant

(C) discovering new materials rom which toconstruct implant devices

(D) deciding in what situations implants are needed(E) determining the importance o short-term

implants to long-term stability o tissue-implant interaces

18. Te passage suggests which o the ollowing aboutthe recent research mentioned in lines 16-21 ?

(A) It has solved one set o problems but hascreated another.

(B) It has concentrated on secondary concerns buthas ignored primary concerns.

(C) It has improved practical applications obiomaterial technology without providinga complete theoretical explanation o thatimprovement.

(D) It has thoroughly investigated properties obiomaterials but has paid little attention torelevant characteristics o human tissue.

(E) It has provided considerable inormation onshort-term implant technology but little onlong-term implant technology.

19. Te author’s primary purpose is to

(A) answer a theoretical question in the field obiomaterials

(B) discuss the current state o technology in thefield o biomaterials

(C) resolve a research dispute in the field o

biomaterials(D) predict an ethical crisis or biomaterials

researchers(E) suggest some practical benefits o biomaterial

implants

22.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Islamic law is a particularly instructive example o“sacred law.” Islamic law is a phenomenon so differentrom all other orms o law—not withstanding o coursea considerable and inevitable number o coincidenceswith one or the other o them as ar as subject matterand positive enactments are concerned—that its study

is indispensable in order to appreciate adequately theull range o possible legal phenomena. Even the twoother representatives o sacred law that are historicallyand geographically nearest to it, Jewish law and RomanCatholic canon law, are perceptibly different.

Both Jewish law and canon law are more uniormthan Islamic law. Tough historically there is adiscernible break between Jewish law o the sovereignstate o ancient Israel and o the Diaspora (the dispersiono Jewish people afer the conquest o Israel), the spirito the legal matter in later parts o the Old estamentis very close to that o the almud, one o the primarycodifications o Jewish law in the Diaspora. Islam, on the

other hand, represented a radical breakaway rom theArab paganism that preceded it, Islamic law is the resulto an examination, rom a religious angle, o legal subjectmatter that was

gal elements taken over rom the non-Arab peoples o the conquered territories. All this wasunified by being subjected to the same kind o religiousscrutiny, the impact o which varied greatly, being almostnonexistent in some fields, and in others originatingnovel institutions. Tis central duality o legal subjectmatter and religious norm is additional to the variety o

legal, ethical, and ritual rules that is typical o sacred law.In its relation to the secular state, Islamic law

differed rom both Jewish and canon law. Jewish lawwas buttressed by the cohesion o the community,reinorced by pressure rom outside: its rules are thedirect expression o this eeling o cohesion, tendingtoward the accommodation o dissent. Canon andIslamic law, on the contrary, were dominated by thedualism o religion and state, where the state was not, incontrast with Judaism, an alien power but the politicalexpression o the same religion. But the conflict betweenstate and religion took different orms; in Christianity

it appeared as the struggle or political power on thepart o a tightly organized ecclesiastical hierarchy, andcanon law was one o its political weapons. Islamic law,on the other hand, was never supported by an organizedinstitution; consequently, there never developed anovert trial o strength. Tere merely existed discordancebetween application o the sacred law and many o theregulations ramed by Islamic states; this antagonism varied according to place and time.

20. Te author’s purpose in comparing Islamic law toJewish law and canon law is most probably to

(A) contend that traditional legal subject matterdoes not play a large role in Islamic law

(B) support his argument that Islamic law is aunique kind o legal phenomenon

(C) emphasize the variety o orms that can all beconsidered sacred law

(D) provide an example o how he believescomparative institutional study should beundertaken

(E) argue that geographical and historical proximitydoes not necessarily lead to parallelinstitutional development

21. Te passage provides inormation to answer which othe ollowing questions?

(A) Does Islamic law depend on sources other than

Arab legal principles?(B) What secular practices o Islamic states

conflicted with Islamic law?(C) Are Jewish law and canon law the most typical

examples o sacred law?(D) Is Jewish law more uniorm than canon law?(E) What characterized Arab law o the pre-Islamic

era?

22. According to the passage, which o the ollowingstatements about sacred law is correct?

(A) Te various systems o sacred law originated in

a limited geographical area.(B) Te various systems o sacred law have had

marked influence on one another.(C) Systems o sacred law usually rely on a wide

variety o precedents.(D) Systems o sacred law generally contain

prescriptions governing diverse aspects ohuman activity.

(E) Systems o sacred law unction most effectivelyin communities with relatively smallpopulations.

22.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


23. It can be inerred rom the passage that theapplication o Islamic law in Islamic states has

(A) systematically been opposed by groups whobelieve it is contrary to their interests

(B) suffered irreparably rom the lack o firminstitutional backing

(C) requently been at odds with the legal activity ogovernment institutions

(D) remained unaffected by the political orcesoperating alongside it

(E) benefited rom the act that it never experienceda direct conrontation with the state

24. Which o the ollowing most accurately describes theorganization o the passage?

(A) A universal principle is advanced and thendiscussed in relation to a particular historicalphenomenon.

(B) A methodological innovation is suggested andthen examples o its

lude new data.(D) A general opinion is expressed and then

supportive illustrations are advanced.(E) A controversial viewpoint is presented and then

both supportive evidence and contradictoryevidence are cited.

25. Te passage implies that the relationship o Islamic,Jewish, and canon law is correctly described by

which o the ollowing statements?I. Because each constitutes an example o sacred

law, they necessarily share some eatures.II. Tey each developed in reaction to the

intererence o secular political institutions.III. Te differences among them result partly rom

their differing emphasis on purely ethicalrules

(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only

(E) I, III and III

26. Te passage suggests that canon law differs romIslamic law in that only canon law

(A) contains prescriptions that non sacred legalsystems might regard as properly legal

(B) concerns itsel with the duties o a person inregard to the community as a whole

(C) was affected by the tension o the conflictbetween religion and state

(D) developed in a political environment that didnot challenge its undamental existence

(E) played a role in the direct conrontationbetween institutions vying or power

27. All the ollowing statements about the developmento Islamic law are implied in the passage EXCEP:

(A) Pre-Islamic legal principles were incorporatedinto Islamic law with widely differing degreeso change.

(B) Diverse legal elements were joined togetherthrough the application o a purely religiouscriterion.

(C) Although some o the sources o Islamic lawwere pagan, its integrity as a sacred law wasnot compromised by their incorporation.

(D) Tere was a undamental shared characteristicin all pre-Islamic legal matter taken over byIslamic law.

(E) Although Islam emerged among the Arabs,Islamic law was influenced by ethnicallydiverse elements.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 22.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) C

19) B

SECOND PASSAGE

20) B

21) A

22) D

23) C

24) D

25) A

26) E

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


A mysterious phenomenon is the ability o over-water migrants to travel on course. Birds, bees, andother species can keep track o time without any sensorycues rom the outside world, and such “biologicalclocks” clearly contribute to their “compass sense.” Forexample, they can use the position o the Sun or stars,

along with the time o day, to find north. But compasssense alone cannot explain how birds navigate theocean: afer a flock traveling east is blown ar south by astorm, it will assume the proper northeasterly course tocompensate. Perhaps, some scientists thought, migrantsdetermine the

ers now know that some specieshave a magnetic sense, which might allow migrantsto determine their geographic location by detecting variations in the strength o the Earth’s magnetic field.

17. Te main idea o the passage is that

(A) migration over land requires a simplerexplanation than migration over water does

(B) the means by which animals migrate over waterare complex and only partly understood

(C) the ability o migrant animals to keep track otime is related to their magnetic sense

(D) knowledge o geographic location is essential tomigrants with little or no compass sense

(E) explanations o how animals migrate tend toreplace, rather than build on, one another

18. It can be inerred rom the passage that i the flocko birds described in lines 7-11 were navigating bycompass sense alone, they would, afer the storm fly

(A) east(B) north(C) northwest(D) south(E) southeast

19. In maintaining that migrating animals would need“a antastic map sense” (lines 14-15) to determinetheir geographic position by celestial navigation,the author intends to express

(A) admiration or the ability o the migrants(B) skepticism about celestial navigation as an

explanation(C) certainty that the phenomenon o migration

will remain mysterious(D) interest in a new method o accounting or

over-water migration(E) surprise that animals apparently navigate in

much the same way that human beings do

20. O the ollowing descriptions o migrating animals,which most strongly suggests that the animals aredepending on magnetic cues to orient themselves?

(A) Pigeons can properly readjust their course

even when flying long distances throughexceedingly dense ogs.

(B) Bison are able to reach their destination bypassing through a landscape that has beenpartially altered by a recent fire.

(C) Elephants are able to find grounds that somemembers o the herd have never seen beore.

(D) Swallows arc able to return to a given spot atthe same time every year.

(E) Monarch butterflies coming rom different partso North America are able to arrive at thesame location each winter.

23.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Roger Rosenblatt’s book Black Fiction, in attemptingto apply literary rather than sociopolitical criteria to itssubject, successully alters the approach taken by mostprevious studies. As Rosenblatt notes, criticism o Blackwriting has ofen served as a pretext or expounding onBlack history. Addison Gayle’s recent work, or example,

judges the value o Black fiction by overtly politicalstandards, rating each work according to the notions oBlack identity which it propounds.

Although fiction assuredly springs rom politicalcircumstances, its authors react to those circumstancesin ways other than ideological, and talking aboutnovels and stories primarily as instruments oideology circumvents much o the fictional enterprise.Rosenblatt’s literary analysis discloses affinities andconnections among works o Black

ignored.Writing acceptable criticism o Black fiction,

however, presupposes giving satisactory answers to a

number o questions. First o all, is there a sufficientreason, other than the racial identity o the authors, togroup together works by Black authors? Second, howdoes Black fiction make itsel distinct rom other modernfiction with which it is largely contemporaneous?Rosenblatt shows that Black fiction constitutes a distinctbody o writing that has an identifiable, coherent literarytradition. Looking at novels written by Blacks over thelast eighty years, he discovers recurring concerns anddesigns independent o chronology. Tese structuresare thematic, and they spring, not surprisingly, rom thecentral act that the Black characters in these novels exist

in a predominantly White culture, whether they try toconorm to that culture or rebel against it.

Black Fiction does leave some aesthetic questionsopen. Rosenblatt’s thematic analysis permitsconsiderable objectivity; he even explicitly states thatit is not his intention to judge the merit o the variousworks— yet his reluctance seems misplaced, especiallysince an attempt to appraise might have led to interestingresults. For instance, some o the novels appear to bestructurally diffuse. Is this a deect, or are the authorsworking out o, or trying to orge, a different kind oaesthetic? In addition, the style o some Black novels,

like Jean oomer’s Cane, verges on expressionism orsurrealism; does this technique provide a counterpointto the prevalent theme that portrays the ate againstwhich Black heroes are pitted, a theme usually conveyedby more naturalistic modes o expression?

In spite o such omissions, what Rosenblatt doesinclude in his discussion makes or an astute andworthwhile study. Black Fiction surveys a wide varietyo novels, bringing to our attention in the process some

ascinating and little-known works like James WeldonJohnson’s Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man. Itsargument is tightly constructed, and its orthright, lucistyle exemplifies levelheaded and penetrating criticism

21. Te author o the passage objects to criticism o Black

fiction like that by Addison Gayle because it(A) emphasizes purely literary aspects o such

fiction(B) misinterprets the ideological content o such

fiction(C) misunderstands the notions o Black identity

contained in such fiction(D) substitutes political or literary criteria in

evaluating such fiction(E) ignores the interplay between Black history and

Black identity displayed in such fiction

22. Te author o the passage is primarily concernedwith

(A) evaluating the soundness o a work o criticism(B) comparing various critical approaches to a

subject(C) discussing the limitations o a particular kind o

criticism(D) summarizing the major points made in a work

o criticism(E) explaining the theoretical background o a

certain kind o criticism

23.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


23. Te author o the passage believes that Black Fiction would have been improved had Rosenblatt

(A) evaluated more careully the ideological andhistorical aspects o Black fiction

(B) attempted to be more objective in his approachto novels and stories by Black authors

(C) explored in greater detail the recurrent thematicconcerns o Black fiction throughout itshistory

(D) established a basis or placing Black fictionwithin its own unique literary tradition

(E) assessed the relative literary merit o the novelshe analyzes thematically

24. Te author’s discussion o Black Fiction can be bestdescribed as

(A) pedantic and contentious(B) critical but admiring

(C)ironic and deprecating(D) argumentative but unocused(E) stilted and insincere

25. It can be inerred that the author o the passagewould be LEAS likely to approve o which o theollowing?

(A) An analysis o the influence o political eventson the personal ideology o Black writers

(B) A critical study that applies sociopoliticalcriteria to autobiographies by Black authors

(C) A literary study o Black poetry that appraises

the merits o poems according to the politicalacceptability o their themes

(D) An examination o the growth o a distinctBlack literary tradition within the context oBlack history

(E) A literary study that attempts to isolate aestheticqualities unique to Black fiction

26. Te author o the passage uses all o the ollowing inthe discussion o Rosenblatt’s book EXCEP

(A) rhetorical questions(B) specific examples(C) comparison and contrast(D) definition o terms

(E) personal opinion

27. Te author o the passage reers to James WeldonJohnson’s Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Manmost probably in order to

(A) point out affinities between Rosenblatt’smethod o thematic analysis and earliercriticism

(B) clariy the point about expressionistic stylemade earlier in the passage

(C) qualiy the assessment o Rosenblatt’s bookmade in the first paragraph o the passage

(D) illustrate the affinities among Black novelsdisclosed by Rosenblatt’s literary analysis

(E) give a specific example o one o theaccomplishments o Rosenblatt’s work

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 23.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) A

19) B

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) D

22) A

23) E

24) B

25) C

26) D

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Te molecules o carbon dioxide in the Earth’satmosphere affect the heat balance o the Earth byacting as a one-way screen. Although these moleculesallow radiation at visible wavelengths, where most othe energy o sunlight is concentrated, to pass through,they absorb some o the longer-wavelength, inrared

emissions radiated rom the Earth’s surace, radiationthat would otherwise be transmitted back into space. Forthe Earth to maintain a constant average temperature,such emissions rom the planet must balance incomingsolar radiation. I there were no

lid mass o ice.oday, however, the potential problem is too much

carbon dioxide. Te burning o ossil uels and theclearing o orests have increased atmospheric carbondioxide by about 15 percent in the last hundredyears, and we continue to add carbon dioxide to the

atmosphere. Could the increase in carbon dioxide causea global rise in average temperature, and could sucha rise have serious consequences or human society?Mathematical models that allow us to calculate the risein temperature as a unction o the increase indicate thatthe answer is probably yes.

Under present conditions a temperature o -18°Ccan be observed at an altitude o 5 to 6 kilometers abovethe Earth. Below this altitude (called the radiating level),the temperature increases by about 6°C per kilometerapproaching the Earth’s surace, where the averagetemperature is about 15°C. An increase in the amount

o carbon dioxide means that there are more moleculeso carbon dioxide to absorb inrared radiation. As thecapacity o the atmosphere to absorb inrared radiationincreases, the radiating level and the temperature o thesurace must rise.

One mathematical model predicts that doubling theatmospheric carbon dioxide would raise the global meansurace temperature by 2.5° C. Tis model assumes thatthe atmosphere’s relative humidity remains constantand the temperature decreases with altitude at a rateo 6.5° C per kilometer. Te assumption o constantrelative humidity is important, because water vapor in

the atmosphere is another efficient absorber o radiationat inrared wavelengths. Because warm air can holdmore moisture than cool air, the relative humiditywill be constant only i the amount o water vapor in

the atmosphere increases as the temperature rises.Tereore, more inrared radiation would be absorbedand reradiated back to the Earth’s surace. Te resultanwarming at the surace could be expected to melt snowand ice, reducing the Earth’s reflectivity. More solarradiation would then be absorbed, leading to a urther

increase in temperature.


(A) warn o the dangers o continued burning oossil uels

(B) discuss the significance o increasing theamount o carbon dioxide in the atmosphere

(C) explain how a constant temperature ismaintained on the Earth’s surace

(D) describe the ways in which various atmosphericand climatic conditions contribute to theEarth’s weather

(E) demonstrate the useulness o mathematicalmodels in predicting long-range climaticchange

18. According to the passage, the greatest part o thesolar energy that reaches the Earth is

(A) concentrated in the inrared spectrum(B) concentrated at visible wavelengths(C) absorbed by carbon dioxide molecules(D) absorbed by atmospheric water vapor(E) reflected back to space by snow and ice

23.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. According to the passage, atmospheric carbondioxide perorms all o the ollowing unctionsEXCEP

(A) absorbing radiation at visible wavelengths(B) absorbing inrared radiation(C) absorbing outgoing radiation rom the Earth

(D) helping to retain heat near the Earth’s surace(E) helping to maintain a constant average

temperature on the Earth’s surace

20. Which o the ollowing best describes the author’sattitude toward the increasing amount o carbondioxide in the atmosphere and its consequences?

(A) Incredulous(B) Completely detached(C) interested but skeptical(D) Angry yet resigned(E) Objective yet concerned

21. It can be concluded rom inormation containedin the passage that the average temperature at analtitude o 1 kilometer above the Earth is about

(A) 15°C(B) 9°C(C) 2.5°C(D) -12°C(E) -18°C

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that theconstruction o the mathematical model mentionedin the passage involved the ormulation o which othe ollowing?

(A) An assumption that the amount o carbondioxide added to the atmosphere would in

reality steadily increase(B) An assumption that human activities are the

only agencies by which carbon dioxide isadded to the atmosphere

(C) Assumptions about the social and politicalconsequences o any curtailment o the use oossil uels

(D) Assumptions about the physical conditions thatare likely to prevail during the period orwhich the model was made

(E) Assumptions about the differential behavior ocarbon dioxide molecules at the various levels

o temperature calculated in the model

23. According to the passage, which o the ollowing istrue o the last hundred years?

(A) Fossil uels were burned or the first time.(B) Greater amounts o land were cleared than at

any time beore.(C) Te average temperature at the Earth’s surace

has become 2°C cooler.(D) Te amount o carbon dioxide in the

atmosphere has increased measurably.(E) Te amount o armland worldwide has

doubled.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Some modem anthropologists hold that biologicalevolution has shaped not only human morphology butalso human behavior. Te role those anthropologistsascribe to evolution is n

ng that “come naturally” in

archetypal situations in any culture. Our , “railties”—emotions and motives such as rage, ear, greed, gluttony, joy, rust, love—may be a very mixed assortment, butthey share at least one immediate quality: we are, as wesay, “in the grip” o them. And thus they give us oursense o constraints.

Unhappily, some o those railties—our need orever-increasing security among them—are presentlymaladaptive. Yet beneath the overlay o cultural detail,they, too, are said to be biological in direction, andthereore as natural to us as are our appendixes. Wewould need to comprehend thoroughly their adaptiveorigins in order to understand how badly they guide us

now. And we might then begin to resist their pressure.

24. Te primary purpose o the passage is to present

(A) a position on the oundations o humanbehavior and on what those oundationsimply

(B) a theory outlining the parallel development ohuman morphology and o human behavior

(C) a diagnostic test or separating biologicallydetermined behavior patterns rom culture-specific detail

(D) a practical method or resisting the pressures obiologically determined drives

(E) an overview o those human emotions andmotives that impose constraints on humanbehavior

25. Te author implies that control to any extent over the“railties” that constrain our behavior is thought topresuppose

(A) that those railties are recognized as currentlybeneficial and adaptive

(B) that there is little or no overlay o cultural detailthat masks their true nature

(C) that there are cultures in which those railtiesdo not ‘’come naturally” and rom which suchcontrol can be learned

(D) a ull understanding o why those railtiesevolved and o how they unction now

(E) a thorough grasp o the principle that culturaldetail in human behavior can differ arbitrarilyrom society to society

26. Which o the ollowing most probably provides anappropriate analogy rom human morphology orthe “details” versus “constraints” distinction madein the passage in relation to human behavior?

(A) Te ability o most people to see all the colors othe visible spectrum as against most people’s

inability to name any but the primary colors(B) Te ability o even the least ortunate people to

show compassion as against people’s inabilityto mask their eelings completely

(C) Te ability o some people to dive to greatdepths as against most people’s inability toswim long distances

(D) Te psychological profile o those people whoare able to delay gratification as againstpeople’s inability to control their livescompletely

(E) Te greater lung capacity o mountain peoples

that helps them live in oxygen-poor air asagainst people stability to fly without specialapparatus

27. It can be inerred that in his discussion omaladaptive railties the author assumes that

(A) evolution does not avor the emergence oadaptive characteristics over the emergenceo maladaptive ones

(B) any structure or behavior not positivelyadaptive is regarded as transitory inevolutionary theory

(C) maladaptive characteristics, once fixed,make the emergence o other maladaptivecharacteristics more likely

(D) the designation o a characteristic as beingmaladaptive must always remain highlytentative

(E) changes in the total human environment canoutpace evolutionary change

23.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 23.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) B

19) A

20) E

21) B

22) D

23) D

SECOND PASSAGE

24) A

25) D

26) E

27) E

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

A Marxist sociologist has argued that racism stemsrom the class struggle that is unique to the capitalistsystem—that racial prejudice is generated by capitalistsas a means o controlling workers. His thesis worksrelatively well when applied to discrimination againstBlacks in the United State

ccepted as a race in any givenregion o ethnic competition,” can be interpreted as alsoincluding hostility toward such ethnic groups as theChinese in Caliornia and the Jews in medieval Europe.However, since prejudice against these latter peoples wasnot inspired by capitalists, he has to reason that suchantagonisms were not really based on race. He disposesthusly (albeit unconvincingly) o both the intoleranceaced by Jews beore the rise o capitalism and the early-twentieth century discrimination against Oriental peoplein Caliornia, which, inconveniently was instigated byworkers.

17. Te passage supplies inormation that would answerwhich o the ollowing questions?

(A) what accounts or the prejudice against theJews in medieval Europe?

(B) what conditions caused the discriminationagainst oriental people in Caliornia in theearly twentieth century?

(C) which group are not in ethnic competition witheach other in the United States?

(D) what explanation did the Marxist sociologistgive or the existence o racial prejudice?

(E) what evidence did the Marxist sociologistprovide to support his thesis?

18. Te author considers the Marxist sociologist’s thesisabout the origins o racial prejudice to be

(A) unoriginal(B) unpersuasive(C) offensive(D) obscure

(E) speculative

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that the Marxistsociologist would argue that in a non capitalistsociety racial prejudice would be

(A) pervasive(B) tolerated(C) ignored(D) orbidden(E) nonexistent

20. According to the passage, the Marxist sociologist’s

chain o reasoning required him to assert thatprejudice toward Oriental people in Caliornia was

(A) directed primarily against the Chinese(B) similar in origin to prejudice against the Jews(C) understood by oriental people as ethnic

competition(D) provoked by workers(E) nonracial in character

24.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

By 1950, the results o attempts to relate brainprocesses to mental experience appeared ratherdiscouraging. Such variations in size, shape, chemistry,conduction speed, excitation threshold, and the likeas had been demonstrated in nerve cells remainednegligible in significance or any possible correlation

with the maniold dimensions o mental experience.Near the turn o the century, it had been suggestedby Hearing that different modes o sensation, suchas pain, taste, and color, might be correlated with thedischarge o specific kinds o nervous energy. However,subsequently developed methods o recording andanalyzing nerve potentials ailed to reveal any suchqualitative diversity. It was possible to demonstrate byother methods refined structural differences amongneuron types; however, proo was lacking that thequality o the impulse or its conduction was influencedby these differences, which seemed instead to influencethe developmental patter

ance among nerve energieswas never rigidly disproved, the doctrine was generallyabandoned in avor o the opposing view, namely, thatnerve impulses are essentially homogeneous in qualityand are transmitted as “common currency” throughoutthe nervous system. According to this theory, it is not thequality o the sensory nerve impulses that determinesthe diverse conscious sensations they produce, butrather the different areas o the brain into which theydischarge, and there is some evidence or this view.In one experiment, when an electric stimulus wasapplied to a given sensory field o the cerebral cortex

o a conscious human subject, it produced a sensationo the appropriate modality or that particular locus,that is a visual sensation rom the visual cortex, anauditory sensation rom the auditory cortex, and soon. Other experiments revealed slight variations in thesize, number, arrangement, and interconnection o thenerve cells, but as ar as psycho neural correlations wereconcerned, the obvious similarities o these sensoryfields to each other seemed much more remarkable thanany o the minute differences.

However, cortical locus, in itsel, turned out to havelittle explanatory value. Studies showed that sensations as

diverse as those o red, black, green, and white, or touch,cold, warmth, movement, pain, posture, and pressureapparently may arise through activation o the samecortical areas. What seemed to remain was some kind odifferential patterning effects in the brain excitation: it isthe difference in the central distribution o impulses thatcounts. In short, brain theory suggested a correlationbetween mental experience and the activity o relatively

homogeneous nerve-cell units conducting essentiallyhomogeneous impulses through homogeneous cerebratissue. o match the multiple dimensions o mentalexperience psychologists could only point to a limitless variation in the spatiotemporal patterning o nerveimpulses.

21. Te author suggests that, by 1950, attempts tocorrelate mental experience with brain processeswould probably have been viewed with

(A) indignation(B) impatience(C) pessimism(D) indifference(E) defiance

22. Te author mentions “common currency” in line 24in primarily in order to emphasize the

(A) lack o differentiation among nerve impulses inhuman beings

(B) similarity o the sensations that all humanbeings experience

(C) similarities in the views o scientists who havestudied the human nervous system

(D) continuous passage o nerve impulses throughthe nervous system

(E) recurrent questioning by scientists o anaccepted explanation about the nervoussystem

23. Te description in lines 30-36 o an experiment inwhich electric stimuli were applied to differentsensory fields o the cerebral cortex tends tosupport the theory that

(A) the simple presence o different cortical areascannot account or the diversity o mentalexperience

(B) variation in spatiotemporal patterning onerve impulses correlates with variation insubjective experience

(C) nerve impulses are essentially homogeneousand are relatively unaffected as they travel

through the nervous system(D) the mental experiences produced by sensory

nerve impulses are determined by the corticaarea activated

(E) variation in neuron types affects the quality onerve impulses

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. According to the passage, some evidence existsthat the area o the cortex activated by a sensorystimulus determines which o the ollowing?

I. Te nature o the nerve impulseII. Te modality o the sensory experienceIII. Qualitative differences within a modality

(A) II only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

25. Te passage can most accurately be described as adiscussion concerning historical views o the

(A) anatomy o the brain(B) manner in which nerve impulses are conducted(C) significance o different cortical areas in mental

experience

(D) mechanics o sense perception(E) physiological correlates o mental experience

26. Which o the ollowing best summarizes the author’sopinion o the suggestion that different areas o thebrain determine perceptions produced by sensorynerve impulses?

(A) It is a plausible explanation, but it has not beencompletely proved.

(B) It is the best explanation o brain processescurrently available.

(C) It is disproved by the act that the various areaso the brain are physiologically very similar.

(D) Tere is some evidence to support it, but it ailsto explain the diversity o mental experience.

(E) Tere is experimental evidence that confirms itscorrectness.

27. It can be inerred rom the passage that which o theollowing exhibit the LEAS qualitative variation?

(A) Nerve cells

(B) Nerve impulses(C) Cortical areas(D) Spatial patterns o nerve impulses(E) emporal patterns o nerve impulses

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 24.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) B

19) E

20) E

SECOND PASSAGE

21) C

22) A

23) D

24) A

25) E

26) D

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Te transer o heat and water vapor rom theocean to the air above it depends on a disequilibriumat the interace o the water and the air. Within abouta millimeter o the water, air temperature is close tothat o the surace water, and the air is nearly saturatedwith water vapor. But the differences, however small,

are crucial, and the disequilibrium is maintained byair near the sura

“mixed by means o turbulence thatdepends on the wind or its energy. As wind speedincreases, so does turbulence, and thus the rate o heatand moisture transer. Detailed understanding o thisphenomenon awaits urther study. An interacting—andcomplicating—phenomenon is wind-to-water transer omomentum that occurs when waves are ormed. Whenthe wind makes waves, it transers important amounts oenergy—energy that is thereore not available to provideturbulence.


(A) resolve a controversy (B) describe a phenomenon(C) outline a theory (D) confirm research findings(E) classiy various observations

18. According to the passage, wind over the oceangenerally does which o the ollowing?

I. Causes relatively cool, dry air to come into

proximity with the ocean surace.II. Maintains a steady rate o heat and moisturetranser between the ocean and the air.

III. Causes requent changes in the temperature othe water at the ocean’s surace.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

19. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorregards current knowledge about heat and moisturetranser rom the ocean to air as

(A) revolutionary (B) inconsequential(C) outdated

(D) derivative(E) incomplete

20. Te passage suggests that i on a certain day the windwere to decrease until there was no wind at all,which o the ollowing would occur?

(A) Te air closest to the ocean surace wouldbecome saturated with water vapor.

(B) Te air closest to the ocean surace would bewarmer than the water.

(C) Te amount o moisture in the air closest to theocean surace would decrease.

(D) Te rate o heat and moisture transer wouldincrease.

(E) Te air closest to the Ocean would be at thesame temperature as air higher up.

24.2 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Extraordinary creative activity has beencharacterized as revolutionary, flying in the ace o whatis established and producing not what is acceptablebut what will become accepted. According to thisormulation, highly creative activity transcends thelimits o an existing orm and establishes a new principle

o organization. However, the idea that extraordinarycreativity transcends established limits is misleadingwhen it is applied to the arts, even though it may be validor the sciences. Differences between highly creative artand highly creative science arise in part rom a differencein their goals. For the sciences, a new theory is the goaland end result o the creative act. Innovative scienceproduces new propositions in terms o which diversephenomena can be related to one another in morecoherent ways. Such phenomena as a brilliant diamondor a nesting bird are relegated to the role o data, servingas the means or ormulating or testing a new theory.Te goal o highly creative art is very different: the

phenomenon itsel becomes the direct product o thecreative act. Shakespeare’s Hamlet is not a tract aboutthe behavior o indecisive princes or the uses o politicalpower: nor is Picasso’s painting Guernica primarily aprepositional statement about the Spanish Civil War orthe evils o ascism. What highly creative artistic activityproduces is not a new generalization that transcendsestablished limits, but rather an aesthetic particular.Aesthetic particulars produced by the highly creativeartist extend or exploit, in an innovative way, the limitso an existing orm, rather than transcend that orm.

Tis is not to deny that a highly creative artist

sometimes establishes a new principle o organization inthe history o an artistic field; the composer Monteverdi,who created music o the highest aesthetic value, comesto mind. More generally, however, whether or not acomposition establishes a new principle in the history omusic has little bearing on its aesthetic worth. Becausethey embody a new principle o organization, somemusical works, such as the operas o the FlorentineCamerata, are o sig

sic. On the other hand, Mozart’sTe Marriage of Figaro is surely among the masterpieces

o music even though its modest innovations areconfined to extending existing means. It has beensaid o Beethoven that he toppled the rules and reedmusic rom the stifling confines o convention. But aclose study o his compositions reveals that Beethovenoverturned no undamental rules. Rather, he was anincomparable strategist who exploited limits—therules, orms, and conventions that he inherited rompredecessors such as Haydn and Mozart, Handel andBach—in strikingly original ways.

21. Te author considers a new theory that coherentlyrelates divers phenomena to one another to be the

(A) basis or reaffirming a well-established scientificormulation

(B) byproduct o an aesthetic experience(C) tool used by a scientist to discover a new

particular(D) synthesis underlying a great work o art(E) result o highly creative scientific activity

22. Te author implies that Beethoven’s music wasstrikingly original because Beethoven

(A) strove to outdo his predecessors by becomingthe first composer to exploit limit

(B) undamentally changed the musical orms o hispredecessors by adopting a richly inventivestrategy

(C) embellished and interwove the melodies o

several o the great composers who precededhim

(D) manipulated the established conventions omusical composition in a highly innovativeashion

(E) attempted to create the illusion o havingtranscended the musical orms o hispredecessors

23. Te passage states that the operas o the FlorentineCamerata are

(A) unjustifiably ignored by musicologists

(B) not generally considered to be o high aesthetic value even though they are important in thehistory o music

(C) among those works in which popular historicalthemes were portrayed in a musicalproduction

(D) ofen inappropriately cited as examples omusical works in which a new principle oorganization was introduced

(E) minor exceptions to the well-establishedgeneralization that the aesthetic worth o acomposition determines its importance in the

history o music

24.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. Te passage supplies inormation or answering all othe ollowing questions EXCEP:

(A) Has unusual creative activity been characterizedas revolutionary?

(B) Did Beethoven work within a musical traditionthat also included Handel and Bach?

(C) Is Mozart’s Te Marriage of Figaro an exampleo a creative work that transcended limits?

(D) Who besides Monteverdi wrote music thatthe author would consider to embody newprinciples o organization and to be o highaesthetic value?

(E) Does anyone claim that the goal oextraordinary creative activity in the artsdiffers rom that o extraordinary creativeactivity in the sciences?

25. Te author regards the idea that all highly creative

artistic activity transcends limits with(A) deep skepticism(B) strong indignation marked indifference(D) moderate amusement(E) sharp derision

26. Te author implies that an innovative scientificcontribution is one that

(A) is cited with high requency in the publicationso other scientists

(B) is accepted immediately by the scientificcommunity

(C) does not relegate particulars to the role o data(D) presents the discovery o a new scientific act(E) introduces a new valid generalization

27. Which o the ollowing statements would mostlogically conclude the last paragraph o the passage

(A) Unlike Beethoven, however, even the greatesto modern composers, such as Stravinsky, didnot transcend existing musical orms.

(B) In similar ashion, existing musical orms wereeven urther exploited by the next generationo great European composers.

(C) Tus, many o the great composers displayedthe same combination o talents exhibited byMonteverdi.

(D) By contrast, the view that creativity in theexploits but does not transcend limits issupported in the field o literature.

(E) Actually, Beethoven’s most original works werelargely unappreciated at the time that theywere first perormed.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 24.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) A

19) E

20) A

SECOND PASSAGE

21) E

22) D

23) B

24) D

25) A

26) E

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


By the time the American colonists took uparms against Great Britain in order to secure theirindependence, the institution o Black slavery wasdeeply entrenched. But the contradiction inherentin this situation was, or many, a source o constantembarrassment. “It always appeared a most iniquitous

scheme to me,” Abigail Adams wrote her husband in1774, “to fight ourselves or what we are daily robbingand plundering rom those who have as good a right toreedom as we have.”

Many Americans besides Abigail Adams werestruck by the inconsistency o their stand during theWar o Independence, and they were not averse tomaking moves to emancipate the slaves. Quakers andother religious groups organized antislavery societies,while numerous individuals manumitted their slaves.In act, within several years o the end o the War oIndependence, most o the Eastern states had madeprovisions or the gradual emancipation o slaves.

17. Which o the ollowing best states the central idea othe passage?

(A) Te War o Independence produced amongmany Black Americans a heightenedconsciousness o the inequities in Americansociety.

(B) Te War o Independence strengthened thebonds o slavery o many Black Americanswhile intensiying their desire to be ree.

(C) Te War o Independence exposed to manyAmericans the contradiction o slavery in acountry seeking its reedom and resulted inefforts to resolve that contradiction.

(D) Te War o Independence provoked strongcriticisms by many Americans o theinstitution o slavery, but produced littlesubstantive action against it.

(E) Te War o Independence “renewed the effortso many American groups toward achievingBlack emancipation.

18. Te passage contains inormation that would supportwhich o the ollowing statements about the

colonies beore the War o Independence?

(A) Tey contained organized antislavery societies.(B) Tey allowed individuals to own slaves.(C) Tey prohibited religious groups rom political

action.(D) Tey were inconsistent in their legal definitions

o slave status.(E) Tey encouraged abolitionist societies to

expand their influence.

19. According to the passage, the War o Independencewas embarrassing to some Americans or which othe ollowing reasons?

I. It involved a struggle or many o the sameliberties that Americans were denying toothers.

II. It involved a struggle or independence rom the very nation that had ounded the colonies.

III. It involved a struggle based on inconsistenciesin the participants conceptions o reedom.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) I and III only (E) I, II and III

20. Which o the ollowing statements regardingAmerican society in the years immediately

ollowing the War o Independence is bestsupported by the passage?

(A) Te unexpected successes o the antislaverysocieties led to their gradual demise in theEastern states.

(B) Some o the newly independent Americanstates had begun to make progress towardabolishing slavery.

(C) Americans like Abigail Adams becamedisillusioned with the slow progress oemancipation and gradually abandoned thecause.

(D) Emancipated slaves gradually were acceptedin the Eastern states as equal members oAmerican society.

(E) Te abolition o slavery in many Eastern stateswas the result o close cooperation betweenreligious groups and ree Blacks.

25.1 - 1st

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

Te evolution o sex ratios has produced, in mostplants and animals with separate sexes, approximatelyequal numbers o males and emales. Why should this beso? wo main kinds o answers have been offered. One iscouched in terms o advantage to population. It is arguedthat the sex ratio will evolve so as to maximize the

number o meetings between individuals o the oppositesex. Tis is essentially a “group selection” argument. Teother, and in my view correct, type o answer was firstput orward by Fisher in 1930. Tis “genetic” argumentstarts rom the assumption that genes can influence therelative numbers o male and emale offspring producedby an individual carrying the genes. Tat sex ratio willbe avored which maximizes the number o descendantsan individual will have and hence the number ogene copies transmitted. Suppose that the populationconsisted mostly o emales: then an individual whoproduced sons only would have more grandchildren.In contrast, i the population consisted mostly o

males, it would pay to have daughters. I, however, thepopulation consisted o equal numbers o males andemales, sons and daughters would be equally valuable.Tus a one-to-one sex ratio is the only stable ratio; itis an “evolutionarily stable strategy.” Although Fisherwrote beore the mathematical theory o games had beendeveloped, his theory incorporates the essential eatureo a game— that the best strategy to adopt depends onwhat others are doing.

Since Fisher’s time, it has been realized that genescan sometimes influence the chro

ion. I such a geneoccurs on a sex-determining (X or Y) chromosome,then highly aberrant sex ratios can occur. But moreimmediately relevant to game theory are the sex ratiosin certain parasitic wasp species that have a large excesso emales. In these species, ertilized eggs develop intoemales and unertilized eggs into males. A emale storessperm and can determine the sex o each egg she laysby ertilizing it or leaving it unertilized. By Fisher’sargument, it should still pay a emale to produce equalnumbers o sons and daughters. Hamilton, noting thatthe eggs develop within their host—the larva o another

insect—and that the newly emerged adult wasps mateimmediately and disperse, offered a remarkably cogentanalysis. Since only one emale usually lays eggs ina given larva, it would pay her to produce one maleonly, because this one male could ertilize all his sisterson emergence. Like Fisher, Hamilton looked or anevolutionarily stable strategy, but he went a step urtherin recognizing that he was looking or a strategy.

21. Te author suggests that the work o Fisher andHamilton was similar in that both scientists

(A) conducted their research at approximately thesame time

(B) sought to manipulate the sex ratios o some othe animals they studied

(C) sought an explanation o why certain sex ratiosexist and remain stable

(D) studied game theory, thereby providingimportant groundwork or the laterdevelopment o strategy theory

(E) studied reproduction in the same animal specie

22. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorconsiders Fisher’s work to be ‘

(A) allacious and unproessional(B) definitive and thorough(C) inaccurate but popular compared with

Hamilton’s work (D) admirable, but not as up-to-date as Hamilton’s

work (E) accurate, trivial compared with Hamilton’s work

23. Te passage contains inormation that would answerwhich o the ollowing questions about wasps?

I. How many eggs does the emale wasp usually layin a single host larva?

II. Can some species o wasp determine sex ratiosamong their offspring?

III. What is the approximate sex ratio among the

offspring o parasitic wasps?(A) I only (B) II only (C) III only (D) I and II only (E) II and III only

24. It can be inerred that the author discusses thegenetic theory in greater detail than the groupselection theory primarily because he believes thatthe genetic theory is more

(A) complicated

(B) accurate(C) popular(D) comprehensive(E) accessible

25.1 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


25. According to the passage, successul game strategydepends on

(A) the ability to adjust one’s behavior in light o thebehavior o others

(B) one’s awareness that there is saety in numbers(C) the degree o stability one can create in one’s

immediate environment(D) the accuracy with which one can predict uture

events(E) the success one achieves in conserving and

storing one’s resources

26. It can be inerred rom the passage that themathematical theory o games has been

(A) developed by scientists with an interest ingenetics

(B) adopted by Hamilton in his research(C) helpul in explaining how genes can sometimes

influence gametes(D) based on animal studies conducted prior to

1930(E) useul in explaining some biological

phenomena

27. Which o the ollowing is NO true o the species oparasitic wasps discussed in the passage?

(A) Adult emale wasps are capable o storingsperm.

(B) Female wasps lay their eggs in the larvae oother insects.

(C) Te emale wasp can be ertilized by a male thatwas hatched in the same larva as hersel.

(D) So ew male wasps are produced that extinctionis almost certain.

(E) Male wasps do not emerge rom their hostsuntil they reach sexual maturity.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Tomas Hardy’s impulses as a writer, all o which heindulged in his novels, were numerous and divergent,and they did not always work together in harmony.Hardy was to some degree interested in exploringhis characters’ psychologies, though impelled less bycuriosity than by sympathy. Occasionally he elt theimpulse to comedy (in all its detached coldness) as wellas the impulse to arce, but he was more ofen inclined tosee tragedy and record it. He was also inclined to literaryrealism in the several senses o that phrase. He wanted todescribe ordinary human beings; he wanted to speculateon their dilemmas rationally (and, unortunately, evenschematically); and he

cend what he considered tobe the banality o solely recording things exactly andto express as well his awareness o the occult and thestrange.

In his novels these various impulses were sacrificed

to each other inevitably and ofen inevitably, becauseHardy did not care in the way that novelists such asFlaubert or James cared, and thereore took paths oleast resistance. Tus, one impulse ofen surrendered toa resher one and, unortunately, instead o exacting acompromise, simply disappeared. A desire to throw overreality a light that never was might give way abruptlyto the desire on the part o what we might consider anovelist-scientist to record exactly and concretely thestructure and texture o a flower. In this instance, thenew impulse was at least an energetic one, and thusits indulgence did not result in a relaxed style. But on

other occasions Hardy abandoned a perilous, risky, andhighly energizing impulse in avor o what was or himthe atally relaxing impulse to classiy and schematizeabstractly. When a relaxing impulse was indulged, thestyle—that sure index o an author’s literary worth—wascertain to become verbose. Hardy’s weakness derivedrom his apparent inability to control the comingsand goings o these divergent impulses and rom hisunwillingness to cultivate and sustain the energetic andrisky ones. He submitted to first one and then another,and the spirit blew where it listed; hence the unevennesso any one o his novels. His most controlled novel,

Under the Greenwood ree, prominently exhibits twodifferent but reconcilable impulses—a desire to be arealist-historian and a desire to be a psychologist olove—but the slight interlockings o plot are not enoughto bind the two completely together. Tus even this booksplits into two disinter parts.

17. Which o the ollowing is the most appropriate titleor the passage, based on its content?

(A) Under the Greenwood ree: Hardy’s Ambiguousriumph

(B) Te Real and the Strange: Te Novelist’s ShifingRealms

(C) Energy Versus Repose: Te Role o OrdinaryPeople in Hardy’s Fiction

(D) Hardy’s Novelistic Impulses: Te Problem oControl

(E) Divergent Impulses: Te Issue o Unity in theNovel

18. Te passage suggests that the author would bemost likely to agree with which o the ollowingstatements about literary realism?

(A) Literary realism is most concerned with theexploration o the internal lives o ordinary

human beings.(B) Te term “literary realism” is susceptible to

more than a single definition.(C) Literary realism and an interest in psychology

are likely to be at odds in a novelist’s work.(D) “Literary realism” is the term most ofen used

by critics in describing the method o Hardy’snovels.

(E) A propensity toward literary realism is a lessinteresting novelistic impulse than is aninterest in the occult and the strange.

19. Te author o the passage considers a writer’s style tobe

(A) a reliable means by which to measure thewriter’s literary merit

(B) most apparent in those parts o the writer’swork that are not realistic.

(C) problematic when the writer attempts to ollowperilous or risky impulses

(D) shaped primarily by the writer’s desire toclassiy and schematize

(E) the most accurate index o the writer’s literaryreputation

25.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. Which o the ollowing words could best besubstituted or “relaxed” (line 31) withoutsubstantially changing the author’s meaning?

(A) inormal(B) confined(C) risky

(D) wordy (E) metaphoric

21. Te passage supplies inormation to suggest that itsauthor would be most likely to agree with whicho the ollowing statements about the novelistsFlaubert and James?

(A) Tey indulged more impulses in their novelsthan did Hardy in his novels.

(B) Tey have elicited a greater degree o avorableresponse rom most literary critics than hasHardy.

(C) In the writing o their novels, they ofen tookpains to effect a compromise among their various novelistic impulses.

(D) Regarding novelistic construction, they caredmore about the opinions o other noveliststhan about the opinions o ordinary readers.

(E) Tey wrote novels in which the impulse towardrealism and the impulse away rom realismwere evident in equal measure.

22. Which o the ollowing statements best describes theorganization o line 23-35 o the passage (“Tus …

abstractly”)?(A) Te author makes a disapproving observation

and then presents two cases, one o whichleads to a qualification o his disapproval andthe other o which does not.

(B) Te author draws a conclusion rom a previousstatement, explains his conclusion in detail,and then gives a series o examples that havethe effect o resolving an inconsistency.

(C) Te author concedes a point and then makesa counterargument, using an extendedcomparison and contrast that qualifies his

original concession.(D) Te author makes a judgment, points out

an exception to his judgment, and thencontradicts his original assertion.

(E) Te author summarizes and explains anargument and then advances a brie historyo opposing arguments.

23. Which o the ollowing statements about the use ocomedy in Hasdy’s novels is best supported by thepassage?

(A) Hardy’s use o comedy in his novels tended toweaken his literary style.

(B) Hardy’s use o comedy in his novels was

inspired by his natural sympathy.(C) Comedy appeared less requently in Hardy’s

novels than did tragedy.(D) Comedy played an important role in Hardy’s

novels though that comedy was usually in theorm o arce.

(E) Comedy played a secondary role in Hardy’smore controlled novels only.

24. Te author implies which o the ollowing aboutUnder the Greenwood ree in relation to Hardy’sother novel?

(A) It is Hardy’s most thorough investigation o thepsychology o love.

(B) Although it is his most controlled novel, it doesnot exhibit any harsh or risky impulses

(C) It, more than his other novels, reveals Hardy asa realist interested in the history o ordinaryhuman beings.

(D) In it Hardy’s novelistic impulses are managedsomewhat better than in his other novels.

(E) Its plot, like the plots o all o Hardy’s othernovels, splits into two distinct parts.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Upwards o a billion stars in our galaxy have burntup their internal energy sources, and so can no longerproduce the heat a star needs to oppose the inward orceo gravity. Tese stars, o more than a ew solar masses,evolve, in general, much more r

n stars). Instead, thecollapse continues until a singularity (an infinitely denseconcentration o matter) is reached.

It would be wonderul to observe a singularityand obtain direct evidence o the undoubtedly bizarrephenomena that occur near one. Unortunately in mostcases a distant observer cannot see the singularity;outgoing light rays are dragged back by gravity soorceully that even i they could start out within a ewkilometers o the singularity, they would end up in thesingularity itsel.

25. Te author’s primary purpose in the passage is to

(A) describe the ormation and nature osingularities

(B) explain why large numbers o stars becomesingularities

(C) compare the characteristics o singularities withthose o stars

(D) explain what happens during the stages o asingularity’s ormation

(E) imply that singularities could be more easilystudied i observers could get closer to them

26. Te passage suggests which o the ollowing aboutthe Sun?

I. Te Sun could evolve to a stage o collapse that isless dense than a singularity.

II. In the Sun, the inward orce o gravity isbalanced by the generation o heat.

III. Te Sun emits more observable light than doesa white dwar or a neutron star.

(A) I only (B) III only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II and III

27. Which o the ollowing sentences would mostprobably ollow the last sentence o the passage?

(A) Tus, a physicist interested in studyingphenomena near singularities would

necessarily hope to find a singularity with ameasurable gravitational field.

(B) Accordingly, physicists to date have been unableto observe directly any singularity.

(C) It is specifically this startling phenomenonthat has allowed us to codiy the scantinormation currently available aboutsingularities.

(D) Moreover, the existence o this extra ordinaryphenomenon is implied in the extensivereports o several physicists.

(E) Although unanticipated, phenomena such as

these are consistent with the structure o asingularity.

25.2 - 2nd

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 25.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) B

19) A

20) D

21) C

22) A

23) C

24) D

SECOND PASSAGE

25) A

26) C

27) B

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

As Gilbert White, Darwin, and others observed longago, all species appear to have the innate capacity to increasetheir numbers rom generation to generation. Te task orecologists is to untangle the environmental and biologicalactors that hold this intrinsic capacity or population growthin check over the long run. Te great variety o dynamic

behaviors exhibited by different populations makes this taskmore difficult: some populations remain roughly constantrom year to year; others exhibit regular cycles o abundanceand scarcity; still others vary wildly, with outbreaks andcrashes that are in some cases plainly correlated with theweather, and in other cases not.

o impose some order on this kaleidoscope o patterns,one school o thought proposes dividing populations intotwo groups. Tese ecologists posit that the relatively steadypopulations have “density-dependent” growth parameters;that is, rates o birth, death, and migration which dependstrongly on population density. Te highly varyingpopulations have “density-independent” growth parameters,

with vital rates buffeted by environmental events; these ratesfluctuate in a way that is wholly independent o populationdensity.

Tis dichotomy has its use, but it can cause problemsi taken too literally. For one thing, no population can bedriven entirely by density-independent actors all the time.No matter how severely or unpre

around their long-termaverages, i there were no density-independent effects,the population would, in the long run, either increase odecrease without bound (barring a miracle by which gainsand losses canceled exactly). Put another way, it may be that

on average 99 percent o all deaths in a population ariserom density-independent causes, and only one percentrom actors varying with density. Te actors making up theone percent may seem unimportant, and their cause may becorrespondingly hard to determine. Yet, whether recognizedor not, they will usually determine the long-term averagepopulation density.

In order to understand the nature o the ecologist’sinvestigation, we may think o the density-dependent effectson growth parameters as the “signal” ecologists ate trying toisolate and interpret, one that tends to make the populationincrease rom relatively low values or decrease rom relatively

high ones, while the density-independent effects act toproduce “noise” in the population dynamics. For populationsthat remain relatively constant, or that oscillate aroundrepeated cycles, the signal can be airly easily characterizedand its effects described, even though the causative biologicalmechanism may remain unknown. For irregularly fluctuationpopulations, we are likely to have too ew observations to haveany hope o extracting the signal orm the over-whelmingnoise. But it now seems clear that all populations are regulatedby a mixture o density-independent and density-independenteffects in varying proportions.


(A) discussing tow categories o actors that contpopulation growth and assessing their relatimportance

(B) describing how growth rates in natural

populations fluctuate over time andexplaining why these changes occur

(C) proposing a hypothesis concerning populatiosizes and suggesting ways to test it

(D) posing a undamental question aboutenvironmental actors in population growtand presenting some currently acceptedanswers

(E) reuting a commonly accepted theory aboutpopulation density and offering a newalternative

18. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorconsiders the dichotomy discussed in the secondparagraph to be

(A) applicable only to erratically fluctuatingpopulations

(B) useul, but only i this limitations are recogni(C) dangerously misleading in most circumstanc(D) a complete and sufficient way to account or

observed phenomena(E) conceptually valid, but too conusing to apply

on a practical basis

19. Which o the ollowing statements can be inerredrom the last paragraph?

(A) For irregularly fluctuation populations,doubling the number o observations madwill probably result in the isolation odensity-independent effects.

(B) Density-dependent effects on populationdynamics do not occur as requently as dodensity-independent effects.

(C) At present, ecologists do not understand anyo the underlying causes o the density-dependent effects they observe in populati

dynamics.(D) Density-dependent effects on growth

parameters are thought to be caused by somsort o biochemical “signaling” that ecologhope eventually to understand.

(E) It is sometimes possible to iner the existenceo a density-dependent actor controllingpopulation growth without understandingcausative mechanism.

26.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


20. According to the passage, which o the ollowing is atrue statement about density-dependent actors inpopulation growth?

(A) Tey ultimately account or long-termpopulation levels.

(B) Tey have little to do with long-term population

dynamics.(C) Tey are always more easily isolated and

described than those that are density-independent.

(D) Tey include random environmental events.(E) Tey contradict current ecological assumptions

about population dynamic.

21. According to the passage, all o the ollowingbehaviors have been exhibited by differentpopulations EXCEP

(A) roughly constant population levels rom year to

year(B) regular cycles o increases and decreases in

numbers(C) erratic increases in numbers correlated with the

weather(D) unchecked increases in numbers over many

generations(E) sudden declines in numbers rom time to time

22. Te discussion concerning population in lines 23-38serves primarily to

(A) demonstrate the difficulties ecologists ace instudying density-dependent actors limitingpopulation growth

(B) advocate more rigorous study o density-

dependent actor in population growth(C) prove that the death rates o any population are

never entirely density-independent(D) give an example o how death rates unction

to limit population densities in typicalpopulations

(E) underline the importance o even small density-dependent actors in regulating long-termpopulation densities

23. In the passage, the author does all o the ollowingEXCEP

(A) cite the views o other biologists(B) define a basic problem that the passage

addresses(C) present conceptual categories used by other

biologists(D) describe the results o a particular study (E) draw a conclusion

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


6

In Raisin in the Sun, Lorraine Hansberry does notreject integration or the economic and moral promiseo the American dream; rather, she remains loyal tothis dream while looking, realistically, at its incompleterealizati

nal” irony that Bigsby attributes to thework. Indeed, a curiously persistent reusal to creditHansberry with a capacity or intentional irony has ledsome critics to interpret the play’s thematic conflictsas mere conusion, contradiction, or eclecticism.Isaacs, or example, cannot easily reconcile Hansberry’sintense concern or her race with her ideal o humanreconciliation. But the play’s complex view o Black sel-esteem and human solidarity as compatible is no more“contradictory” than Du Bois’ amous, well-consideredideal o ethnic sel-awareness coexisting with humanunity, or Fanon’s emphasis on an ideal internationalism

that also accommodates national identities and roles.

24. Te author’s primary purpose in this passage is to

(A) explain some critics’ reusal to consider Raisinin the Sun a deliberately ironic play

(B) suggest that ironic nuances ally Raisin in theSun with Du Bois’ and Fanon’s writings

(C) analyze the undamental dramatic conflicts inRaisin in the Sun

(D) justiy the inclusion o contradictory elementsin Raisin in the Sun

(E) affirm the thematic coherence underlying Raisinin the Sun

25. It can be inerred rom the passage that the authorbelieves which o the ollowing about Hansberry’suse o irony in Raisin in the Sun

(A) It derives rom Hansberry’s eclectic approach todramatic structure.

(B) It is justified by Hansberry’s loyalty to aavorable depiction o American lie.

(C) It is influenced by the themes o works by DuBois and Fanon.

(D) It is more consistent with Hansberry’s concernor Black Americans than with her ideal ohuman reconciliation.

(E) It reflects Hansberry’s reservations about theextent to which the American dream hasbeen realized.

26. In which o the ollowing does the author to thepassage reinorce his criticism o responses such asIsaacs’ to Raisin in the Sun?

(A) Te statement that Hansberry is “loyal” (line 3)to the American dream

(B) Te description o Hansberry’s concern or

Black Americans as ‘intense” (line 14)(C) Te assertion that Hansberry is concerned with

“human solidarity” (line 16)(D) Te description o Du Bois’ ideal as “well-

considered” (line 17)(E) Te description o Fanon’s internationalism as

“ideal” (line 19)

27. Te author o the passage would probably considerwhich o the ollowing judgments to be mostsimilar to the reasoning o critics described in lines9-12 ?

(A) Te world is certainly flat; thereore, the personproposing to sail around it is unquestionablyoolhardy.

(B) Radioactivity cannot be directly perceived;thereore, a scientist could not possiblycontrol it is a laboratory.

(C) Te painter o this picture could not intend itto be unny; thereore, its humor must resultrom a lack o skill.

(D) raditional social mores are beneficial toculture; thereore, anyone who deviates romthem acts destructively.

(E) Filmmakers who produce documentaries dealexclusively with acts; thereore, a filmmakerwho reinterprets particular events inmisleading us.

26.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 26.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) A

18) B

19) E

20) A

21) D

22) E

23) D

SECOND PASSAGE

24) E

25) E

26) D

27) C

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

Some recent historians have argued that lie in theBritish colonies in America rom approximately 1763 to1789 was marked by internal conflicts among colonists.Inheritors o some o the viewpoints o early twentiethcentury Progressive historians such as Beard and Becker,these recent historians have put orward arguments that

deserve evaluation.Te kind o conflict most emphasized by thesehistorians is class conflict. Yet with the RevolutionaryWar dominating these years, how does one distinguishclass conflict within that larger conflict? Certainly notby the side a person supported. Although many othese historians have accepted the earlier assumptionthat Loyalists represented an upper class, new evidenceindicates that Loyalists, like rebels, were drawn rom allsocioeconomic classes. (It is nonetheless probably truethat a larger percentage o the well-to-do joined theLoyalists than joined the rebels.) Looking at the rebelside, we find little evidence or the contention that lower-

class rebels were in conflict with upper-class rebels.Indeed, the war effort against Britain tended to suppressclass conflicts. Where it did not, the disputing rebels oone or another class usually became Loyalists. Loyalismthus operated as a saety valve to remove socioeconomicdiscontent that existed among the rebels. Disputesoccurred, o course, among those who remained onthe rebel side, but the extraordinary social mobility oeighteenth-century American society (with the obviousexception o slaves) usually prevented such disputesrom hardening along class lines. Social structure wasin act so fluid—though recent statistics suggest a

narrowing o economic opportunity as the latter hal othe century progressed — that to talk about social classesat all requires the use o loose economic categoriessuch as rich, poor, and middle class, or eighteenth-century designations like “the better sort.” Despite these vague categories, one should not claim unequivocallythat hostility between recognizable classes cannot belegitimately observed. Outside o New York, however,there were very ew instances o openly expressed classantagonism.

Having said this, however, one must add that thereis much evidence to support the urther claim o recent

historians that sectional conflicts were common between1763 and 1789. Te “Paxton Boys” incident and theRegulator movement are representative examples o thewidespread, and justified, discontent o western settlersagainst colonial or state governments dominated by

eastern interests. Although undertones o class conflictexisted beneath such hostility, the opposition was,primarily geographical. Sectional conflict— which alsoexisted between North and South — deserves urtherinvestigation.

In summary, historians must be careul about the

kind o conflict they emphasize in eighteenth-centuryAmerica. Yet those who stress the achievement o ageneral consensus among the colonists cannot ullyunderstand that consensus without understanding theconflicts that had to be overcome or repressed in orderto reach it.

17. Te author considers the contentions made by therecent historians discussed in the passage to be

(A) potentially verifiable(B) partially justified(C) logically contradictory

(D) ingenious but flawed(E) capricious and unsupported

18. Te author most likely reers to “’historians such asBeard and Becker” (line 5) in order to

(A) isolate the two historians whose work ismost representative o the viewpoints oProgressive historians

(B) emphasize the need to find connectionsbetween recent historical writing and thework o earlier historians

(C) make a case or the importance o the views

o the Progressive historians concerningeighteenth-century American lie(D) suggest that Progressive historians were the first

to discover the particular internal conflicts ineighteenth-century American lie mentionedin the passage

(E) point out historians whose views o historyanticipated some o the views o the recenthistorians mentioned in the passage

26.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

(55)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


19. According to the passage, Loyalism during theAmerican Revolutionary War served the unctiono

(A) eliminating the disputes that existed amongthose colonists who supported the rebel cause

(B) drawing upper, as opposed to lower,

socioeconomic classes away rom the rebelcause

(C) tolerating the kinds o socioeconomicdiscontent that were not allowed to exist onthe rebel side

(D) channeling conflict that existed within asocioeconomic class into the war effortagainst the rebel cause

(E) absorbing members o socioeconomic groupson the rebel side who elt themselvesin contention with members o othersocioeconomic groups

20. Te passage suggests that the author would be likelyto agree with which o the ollowing statementsabout the social structure o eighteenth-centuryAmerican society?

I. It allowed greater economic opportunity than itdid social mobility

II. It permitted greater economic opportunity priorto 1750 than afer 1750.

III. It did not contain rigidly defined socioeconomicdivisions.

IV. It prevented economic disputes rom arising

among members o the society.

(A) I and IV only(B) II and III only(C) III and IV only(D) I, II, and III only(E) I, II, III, and IV

21. It can be inerred rom the passage? that the authorwould be most likely to agree with which o theollowing statements regarding socioeconomic classand support or the rebel and Loyalist causes duringthe American Revolutionary War?

(A) Identiying a person’s socioeconomic class is the

least accurate method o ascertaining whichside that person supported.

(B) Identiying a person as a member o the rebel oro the Loyalist side does not necessarily reveathat person’s particular socioeconomic class.

(C) Both the rebel and the Loyalist sides containedmem

conomic classes on the Loyalist side.(D) Both the rebel and the Loyalist sides contained

members o all socioeconomic classes,although the Loyalist side was made up

primarily o members o the upper classes.(E) Both the rebel and the Loyalist sides containedmembers o all socioeconomic classes,although many upper-class rebels eventually joined the loyalists.

22. Te author suggests which o the ollowing about therepresentativeness o colonial or state governmentsin America rom 1763 to 1789 ?

(A) Te governments inadequately represented theinterests o people in western regions.

(B) Te governments more ofen represented class

interests than sectional interests.(C) Te governments were less representative thanthey had been beore 1763.

(D) Te governments were dominated by theinterests o people o an upper socioeconomicclass.

(E) Te governments o the northern colonies wereless representative than were the governmento the southern colonies.

23. According to the passage, which o the ollowing is a

true statement about sectional conflicts in Americabetween 1763 and 1789?

(A) Tese conflicts were instigated by easterninterests against western settlers.

(B) Tese conflicts were the most serious kind oconflict in America.

(C) Te conflicts eventually led to openly expressedclass antagonism.

(D) Tese conflicts contained an element o classhostility.

(E) Tese conflicts were motivated by classconflicts.

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


0

Since 1953, many experimental attempts tosynthesize the chemical constituents o lie under“primitive Earth conditions” have been perormed,but none o these experiments has produced anythingapproaching the complexity o the simplest organism.Tey have demonstrated, however, that a variety o

the complex molecules currently making up livingorganisms could have been present in the early oceanand atmosphere, with only one limitation: suchmolecules are synthesized ar less readily when oxygen-containing compounds domin

onia.From these studies, scientists have concluded that

the surace o the primitive Earth was covered withoceans containing the molecules undamental to lie.Although, at present, scientists cannot explain howthese relatively small molecules combined to produce

larger, more complex molecules, some scientists haveprecipitously ventured hypotheses that attempt toexplain the development, rom these larger molecules, othe earliest sel-duplicating organisms.

24. According to the passage, which o the ollowingcan be inerred about the process by which thechemical constituents o lie were synthesized underprimitive Earth conditions?

(A) Te synthesis is unlikely to occur under currentatmospheric conditions.

(B) Te synthesis is common in modernlaboratories.

(C) Te synthesis occurs more readily in theatmosphere than in the ocean.

(D) Te synthesis easily produces the most complexorganic molecules.

(E) Te synthesis is accelerated by the presence ooxygen-containing compounds.


(A) point out that theories about how lie developedon Earth have changed little since 1953

(B) warn o increasing levels o hydrogen, methane,and ammonia in the Earth’s atmosphere

(C) describe the development since 1953 o somescientists’ understanding o how lie began onEarth

D demonstrate that the synthesis o lie in thelaboratory is too difficult or moderntechnology

(E) describe how primitive atmospheric conditionsproduced the complex molecules o livingorganisms

26. It can be inerred rom the passage that “somescientists” assume which o the ollowingconcerning “larger, more complex molecules” (line20) ?

(A) Te earliest atmosphere was ormed primarilyo these molecules.

(B) Chemical processes involving these moleculesproceeded much more slowly under primitiveEarth conditions.

(C) Te presence o these molecules wouldnecessarily precede the existence o simpleorganisms.

(D) Experimental techniques will never besufficiently sophisticated to produce in thelaboratory simple organisms rom thesechemical constituents.

(E) Explanations could easily be developed toexplain how simple molecules combined to

orm these more complex ones.

27. Te author’s reaction to the attempts that have beenmade to explain the development o the first sel-duplicating organisms can best be described as

one o (A) enthusiasm(B) expectation(C) dismay (D) skepticism(E) antipathy

26.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 26.2ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) B

18) E

19) E

20) B

21) B

22) A

23) D

SECOND PASSAGE

24) A

25) C

26) C

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


2

Many critics o Emily Brontë’s novel WutheringHeights see its second part as a counterpoint thatcomments on, i it does not reverse, the first part, wherea “romantic” reading receives more confirmation.Seeing the t

s and time shifs. Granted that thepresence o these elements need not argue an authorialawareness o novelistic construction comparable tothat o Henry James, their presence does encourageattempts to uniy the novel’s heterogeneous parts.However, any interpretation that seeks to uniy all othe novel’s diverse elements is bound to be somewhatunconvincing. Tis is not because such an interpretationnecessarily stiffens into a thesis (although rigidity in anyinterpretation o this or o any novel is always a danger),but because Wuthering Heights has recalcitrant elementso undeniable power that, ultimately, resist inclusionin an all-encompassing interpretation. In this respect,

Wuthering Heights shares a eature o Hamlet .

17. According to the passage, which o the ollowing isa true statement about the first and second parts oWuthering Heights?

(A) Te second part has received more attentionrom critics.

(B) Te second pan has little relation to the firstpart.

(C) Te second part annuls the orce o the firstpart.

(D Te second part provides less substantiation ora “romantic” reading.

(E) Te second part is better because it is morerealistic.

18. Which o the ollowing inerences about HenryJames’s awareness o novelistic construction is bestsupported by the passage?

(A) James, more than any other novelist, was awareo the difficulties o novelistic construction.

(B) James was very aware o the details o novelisticconstruction.

(C) James’s awareness o novelistic constructionderived rom his reading o Brontë.

(D) James’s awareness o novelistic construction hasled most commentators to see unity in hisindividual novels.

(E) James’s awareness o novelistic constructionprecluded him rom violating the unity o hisnovels.

19. Te author o the passage would be most likely toagree that an interpretation o a novel should

(A) not try to unite heterogeneous elements in thenovel

(B) not be inflexible in-its treatment o the elementsin the novel

(C) not argue that the complex use o narratorsor o time shifs indicates a sophisticatedstructure

(D) concentrate on those recalcitrant elements othe novel that are outside the novel’s mainstructure

(E). primarily consider those elements o novelisticconstruction o which the author o the novelwas aware

20. Te author o the passage suggests which o theollowing about Hamlet ?

I. Hamlet has usually attracted criticalinterpretations that tend to stiffen into theses

II. Hamlet has elements that are not amenable to anall-encompassing critical interpretation.

III. Hamlet is less open to an all-encompassingcritical interpretation than is WutheringHeights.

IV. Hamlet has not received a critical interpretationthat has been widely accepted by readers.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and IV

(D) III and IV only (E) I, II, and III only

27.1 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014




8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


4

Te determination o the sources o copper oreused in the manuacture o copper and bronze artiactso Bronze Age civilizations would add greatly to ourknowledge o cultural contacts and trade in that era.Researchers have analyzed artiacts and ores or theirconcentrations o elements, but or a variety o reasons,

these studies have generally ailed to provide evidence othe sources o the copper used in the objects. Elementalcomposition can vary within the same copper-orelode, usually because o varying admixtures o otherelements, especially iron, lead, zinc, and arsenic. And highconcentrations o cobalt or zinc, noticed in some artiacts,appear in a variety o coppe

ts evaporate during smeltingand roasting; different temperatures and processesproduce different degrees o loss. Finally, flux, whichis sometimes added during smelting to remove waste

material rom the ore, could add quantities o elements tothe final product.

An elemental property that is unchanged throughthese chemical processes is the isotopic composition oeach metallic element in the ore. Isotopic composition,the percentages o the different isotopes o an element ina given sample o the element, is thereore particularlysuitable as an indicator o the sources o the ore. Ocourse, or this purpose it is necessary to find an elementwhose isotopic composition is more or less constantthroughout a given ore body, but varies rom one copperore body to another or, at least, rom one geographic

region to another.Te ideal choice, when isotopic composition is used

to investigate the source o copper ore, would seem to becopper itsel. It has been shown that small but measurable variations occur naturally in the isotopic composition ocopper. However, the variations are large enough only inrare ores; between samples o the common ore minerals ocopper, isotopic variations greater than the measurementerror have not been ound. An alternative choice is lead,which occurs in most copper and bronze artiacts o theBronze Age in amounts consistent with the lead beingderived rom the copper ores and possibly rom the fluxes.

Te isotopic composition o lead ofen varies rom onesource o common copper ore to another, with variationsexceeding the measurement error; and preliminarystudies indicate virtually uniorm isotopic compositiono the lead rom a single copper-ore source. While someo the lead ound in an artiact may have been introducedrom flux or when other metals were added to the copperore, lead so added in Bronze Age processing would usuallyhave the same isotopic composition as the lead in thecopper ore. Lead isotope studies may thus prove useul orinterpreting the archaeological record o the Bronze Age.


(A) discuss the techniques o analyzing lead isotopecomposition

(B) propose a way to determine the origin o thecopper in certain artiacts

(C) resolve a dispute concerning the analysis o

copper ore(D) describe the deficiencies o a currently used

method o chemical analysis o certain metals(E) offer an interpretation o the archaeological

record o the Bronze Age

22. Te author first mentions the addition o flux duringsmelting (lines 18-21) in order to

(A) give a reason or the ailure o elementalcomposition studies to determine ore sources

(B) illustrate differences between various BronzeAge civilizations

(C) show the need or using high smeltingtemperatures

(D) illustrate the uniormity o lead isotopecomposition

(E) explain the success o copper isotopecomposition analysis

23. Te author suggests which o the ollowing about aBronze Age artiact containing high concentrationso cobalt or zinc?

(A) It could not be reliably tested or its elementalcomposition.

(B) It could not be reliably tested or its copperisotope composition.

(C) It could not be reliably tested or its lead isotopecomposition.

(D) It could have been manuactured rom ore romany one o a variety o sources.

(E) It could have been produced by the additiono other metals during the processing o thecopper ore.

27.1 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. According to the passage, possible sources o the leadound in a copper or bronze artiact include whicho the ollowing?

I. Te copper ore used to manuacture the artiactII. Flux added during processing o the copper oreIII. Other metal added during processing o the

copper ore(A) I only (B) II only (C) III only (D) II and III only (E) I. II, and III

25. Te author rejects copper as the “ideal choice”mentioned in line 33 because

(A) the concentration o copper in Bronze Ageartiacts varies

(B) elements other than copper may be introduced

during smelting(C) the isotopic composition o copper changes

during smelting(D) among common copper ores, differences in

copper isotope composition are too small(E) within a single source o copper ore, copper

isotope composition can vary substantially

26. Te author makes which o the ollowing statementsabout lead isotope composition?

(A) It ofen varies rom one copper-ore source toanother.

(B) It sometimes varies over short distances in asingle copper-ore, source

(C) It can vary during the testing o artiacts,producing a measurement error.

(D) It requently changes during smelting androasting.

(E) It may change when artiacts are buried orthousands o years.

27. It can be inerred rom the passage that the use oflux in processing copper ore can alter the leadisotope composition o the resulting metal EXCEPwhen

(A) there is a smaller concentration o lead in the

flux than in the copper ore(B) the concentration o lead in the flux is

equivalent to that o the lead in the ore(C) some o the lead in the flux evaporates during

processing(D) any lead in the flux has the same isotopic

composition as the lead in the ore(E) other metals are added during processing

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Test 27.1ANSWERS

FIRST PASSAGE

17) D

18) B

19) B

20) B

SECOND PASSAGE

21) B

22) A

23) D

24) E

25) D

26) A

27) D

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Since the Hawaiian Islands have never beenconnected to other land masses, the great variety oplants in Hawaii must be a result o the long-distancedispersal o seeds, a process that requires both a methodo transport and an equivalence between the ecology othe source area and that o the recipient area.

Tere is some dispute about the method o transportinvolved. Some biologists argue that, ocean and aircurrents are responsible

chment o the seeds toeathers, or internally, by the swallowing o ruit andsubsequent excretion o the seeds. While it is likelythat ewer varieties o plant seeds have reached Hawaiiexternally than internally, more varieties are known to beadapted to external than to internal transport.


(A) discussing different approaches biologistshave taken to testing theories about thedistribution o plants in Hawaii

(B) discussing different theories about the transporto plant-seeds to Hawaii

(C) discussing the extent to which air currents areresponsible or the dispersal o plant seeds toHawaii

(D) resolving a dispute about the adaptability oplant seeds to bird transport

(E) resolving a dispute about the ability o birds tocarry plant seeds long distances

18. Te author mentions the results o flotationexperiments on plant seeds (lines 10-12) mostprobably in order to

(A) support the claim that the distribution o plantsin Hawaii is the result o the long-distancedispersal o seeds

(B) lend credibility to the thesis that air currentsprovide a method o transport or plant seedsto Hawaii

(C) suggest that the long-distance dispersal o seedsis a process that requires long periods o time

(D) challenge the claim that ocean currents areresponsible or the transport o plant seeds toHawaii

(E) reute the claim that Hawaiian flora evolvedindependently rom flora in other parts o theworld

19. It can be inerred rom inormation in the passagethat the existence in alpine regions o Hawaii o aplant species that also grows in the southwesternUnited States would justiy which o the ollowingconclusions?

(A) Te ecology o the southwestern United States

is similar in important respects to the ecologyo alpine regions o Hawaii.

(B) Tere are ocean currents that flow rom thesouthwestern United States to Hawaii.

(C) Te plant species discovered in Hawaii musthave traveled rom the southwestern UnitedStates only very recently.

(D) Te plant species discovered in Hawaii reachedthere by attaching to the eathers o birdsmigrating rom the southwestern UnitedStates.

(E) Te plant species discovered in Hawaii is

especially well adapted to transport over longdistances.


(A) Why does successul long-distance dispersal oplant seeds require an equivalence betweenthe-ecology o the source area and that o therecipient area?

(B) Why are more varieties o plant seeds adaptedto external rather than to internal birdtransport?

(C) What varieties o plant seeds are birds that flylong distances most likely to swallow?(D) What is a reason or accepting the long-

distance dispersal o plant seeds as anexplanation or the origin o Hawaiian flora?

(E) What evidence do biologists cite to argue thatocean and air currents are responsible or thetransport o plant seeds to Hawaii?

27.2 - 1st

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


8

A long-held view o the history o the English coloniesthat became the United States has been that England’spolicy toward these colonies beore 1763 was dictated bycommercial interests and that a change to a more imperialpolicy, dominated by expansionist militarist objectives,generated the tensions that ultimately led to the American

Revolution. In a recent study, Stephen Saunders Webb haspresented a ormidable challenge to this view: Accordingto Webb, England already had a military imperial policyor more than a

ding centralized executive power overEngland’s possessions through the use o what Webb calls“garrison government.” Garrison government allowedthe colonists a legislative assembly, but real authority, inWebb’s view; belonged to the colonial governor, who wasappointed by the king and supported by the “garrison,”

that is, by the local contingent o English troops under thecolonial governor’s command.

According to Webb, the purpose o garrisongovernment was to provide military support or a royalpolicy designed to limit the power o the upper classesin the American colonies. Webb argues that the coloniallegislative assemblies represented the interests not othe common people but o the colonial upper classes, acoalition o merchants and nobility who avored sel-ruleand sought to elevate legislative authority at the expenseo the executive. It was, according to Webb, the colonialgovernors who avored the small armer, opposed the

plantation system, and tried through taxation to break uplarge holdings o land. Backed by the military presence othe garrison, these governors tried to prevent the gentryand merchants, allied in the colonial assemblies, romtransorming colonial America into a capitalistic oligarchy.

Webb s study illuminates the political alignmentsthat existed in the colonies in the century prior to theAmerican Revolution, but his view o the crown’s use o themilitary as an instrument o colonial policy is not entirelyconvincing. England during the seventeenth centurywas not noted or its military achievements. Cromwelldid mount England’s most ambitious overseas military

expedition in more than a century, but it proved to be anutter ailure. Under Charles II, the English army was toosmall to be a major instrument o government. Not untilthe war with France in 1697 did William III persuadeParliament to create a proessional standing army, andParliament’s price or doing so was to keep the army undertight legislative control. While it may be true that thecrown attempted to curtail the power o the colonial upperclasses, it is hard to imagine how the English army duringthe seventeenth century could have provided significantmilitary support or such a policy.

21. Te passage can best be described as a

(A) survey o the inadequacies o a conventional viewpoint

(B) reconciliation o opposing points o view (C) summary and evaluation o a recent study (D) deense o a new thesis rom anticipated

objections(E) review o the subtle distinctions between

apparently similar views

22. Te passage suggests that the view reerred to in lines1-7 argued that

(A) the colonial governors were sympathetic to thedemands o the common people

(B) Charles II was a pivotal figure in the shif oEnglish monarchs toward a more imperialpolicy in their governorship o the Americancolonies

(C) the American Revolution was generated largelyout o a conflict between the colonial upperclasses and an alliance o merchants andsmall armers

(D) the military did not play a major role as aninstrument o colonial policy until 1763

(E) the colonial legislative assemblies in thecolonies had little influence over the colonialgovernors

23. It can be inerred rom the passage that Webb wouldbe most likely to agree with which o the ollowing

statements regarding garrison government?(A) Garrison government gave legislative

assemblies in the colonies relatively littleauthority, compared to the authority that itgave the colonial governors.

(B) Garrison government proved relativelyineffective until it was used by Charles II tocurb the power o colonial legislatures.

(C) Garrison government became a less viablecolonial policy as the English Parliamentbegan to exert tighter legislative control overthe English military.

(D) Oliver Cromwell was the first English ruler tomake use o garrison government on a largescale.

(E) Te creation o a proessional standing army inEngland in 1697 actually weakened garrisongovernment by diverting troops rom thegarrisons stationed in the American colonies

27.2 - 2nd

Line(5)

(10)

(15)

(20)

(25)

(30)

(35)

(40)

(45)

(50)

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


24. According to the passage, Webb views Charles IIas the “proper successor” (line 12) o the udormonarchs and Cromwell because Charles II

(A) used colonial tax revenues to und overseasmilitary expeditions

(B) used the military to extend executive power

over the English colonies(C) wished to transorm the American colonies into

capitalistic oligarchies(D) resisted the English Parliament’s efforts to exert

control over the military (E) allowed the American colonists to use

legislative assemblies as a orum or resolvinggrievances against the crown

25. Which o the ollowing, i true, would most seriouslyweaken the author’s assertion in lines 50-54?

(A) Because they were poorly administered,

Cromwell’s overseas military expeditionswere doomed to ailure.

(B) Because it relied primarily on the symbolicpresence o the military, garrison governmentcould be effectively administered with arelatively small number o troops.

(C) Until early in the seventeenth century, noproessional standing army in Europe hadperormed effectively in overseas militaryexpeditions.

(D) Many o the colonial governors appointed bythe crown were also commissioned army

officers.(E) Many o the English troops stationed in theAmerican colonies were veterans o otheroverseas military expeditions.

26. According to Webb’s view o colonial history, whicho the ollowing was (were) true o the merchantsand nobility mentioned in line 28 ?

I. Tey were opposed to policies ormulated byCharles II that would have transormed thecolonies into capitalistic oligarchies.

II. Tey were opposed to attempts by the Englishcrown to limit the power o the legislativeassemblies.

III. Tey were united with small armers in theiropposition to the stationing o English troopsin the colonies.

(A) I only (B) II only (C) I and II only (D) II and III only (E) I, II, and III

27. Te author suggests that i William III had wanted tomake use o the standing army mentioned in line 48to administer garrison government in the Americancolonies, he would have had to

(A) make peace with France(B) abolish the colonial legislative assemblies(C) seek approval rom the English Parliament(D) appoint colonial governors who were more

sympathetic to royal policy (E) raise additional revenues by increasing taxation

o large landholdings in the colonies

8/16/2019 Big Book 082014


Documents

Big Book 082014